w WM8945 Mono Low-Power CODEC with Video Buffer and Touch Panel Controller DESCRIPTION FEATURES The WM8945 is a highly integrated low power hi-fi CODEC designed for portable devices such as digital still cameras. Up to 4 analogue inputs may be connected; a digital microphone interface is also provided. Flexible output mixing options support single-ended and differential configurations, with outputs derived from the digital audio paths or from analogue bypass paths. Mono line output and mono BTL headphone/speaker drive is supported. Flexible digital mixing and powerful DSP functions are available. Programmable filters and other processes may be applied to the ADC or DAC signal paths. The DSP functions include 5 notch filters, 5-band EQ, dynamic range control and the Wolfson ReTune™ feature. The ReTune™ feature is a sophisticated digital filter that can compensate for imperfect characteristics of the housing, loudspeaker or microphone components in an application. The ReTune™ algorithm can provide acoustic equalisation and selective phase (delay) control of specific frequency bands. The WM8945 is controlled via an I2C or SPI interface. Additional functions include 4-wire Touch Panel controller, Auxiliary ADC, Digital beep generator, Video buffer, programmable GPIO functions, Frequency Locked Loop (FLL) for flexible clocking support and integrated LDO for low noise supply regulation. The WM8945 is supplied in 36-ball W-CSP package, ideal for portable systems. DCVDD XP YN YP XN DBVDD SPKVDD TOUCH PANEL INTERFACE Hi-fi audio CODEC - 94dB SNR during ADC recording (‘A’ weighted) - 96dB SNR during DAC playback (‘A’ weighted) 4 analogue audio inputs Integrated bias reference for electret microphones Digital microphone interface Powerful digital mixing / DSP functions: - 5-notch filters - 5-band equalizer (EQ) - ReTune™ parametric filter - Dynamic range control and noise gate - Low-pass/High-pass filters - Direct Form 1 (DF1) programmable digital filter Digital beep generator Mono line output Mono BTL headphone/speaker output driver I2S digital audio interface - sample rates 8kHz to 48kHz Frequency Locked Loop (FLL) frequency conversion / filter Video buffer function 4-wire Touch Panel interface controller Auxiliary ADC for DC measurement or battery monitoring Integrated LDO low-noise voltage regulator 36-ball W-CSP package (2.96 x 3.06 x 0.7mm, 0.5mm pitch) APPLICATIONS Digital Still Cameras (DSC) Multimedia phones VBIN VBREFR VBOUT W WM8945 CURRENT MODE VIDEO BUFFER AUX ADC AUX1 AUX2 LINEOUTL Analogue Mic Mux / PGA IN1L/DMICDAT IN2L ADC L DAC L OUTPUT MIXERS -1 DMICDAT ADC / Record Digital Filters Digital Mic Interface DMICCLK (GPIO) DSP Core (Re-Tune EQ, Dynamic Range Control) DAC Digital Filters SPKOUTL SPKOUTR Digital Beep Generator DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE FLL CONTROL INTERFACE GPIO WOLFSON MICROELECTRONICS plc To receive regular email updates, sign up at http://www.wolfsonmicro.com/enews GPIO1 SDA SCLK CS/GPIO2 CIFMODE/GPIO3 SDOUT/GPIO4 MCLK ADCDAT DACDAT LRCLK BCLK LDOVDD LDO LDOVOUT GND VMIDC Reference MICBIAS Production Data, May 2011, Rev 4.1 Copyright 2011 Wolfson Microelectronics plc WM8945 Production Data TABLE OF CONTENTS DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 1 FEATURES ............................................................................................................ 1 APPLICATIONS..................................................................................................... 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................................................... 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM ................................................................................................ 5 PIN CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................... 6 ORDERING INFORMATION .................................................................................. 6 PIN DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................ 7 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS ........................................................................ 8 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS ..................................................... 8 THERMAL PERFORMANCE ................................................................................. 9 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................... 10 TERMINOLOGY ............................................................................................................. 13 TYPICAL PERFORMANCE ................................................................................. 14 POWER CONSUMPTION .............................................................................................. 15 AUDIO SIGNAL PATHS DIAGRAM .................................................................... 16 SIGNAL TIMING REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 17 SYSTEM CLOCK TIMING .............................................................................................. 17 AUDIO INTERFACE TIMING ......................................................................................... 17 MASTER MODE ........................................................................................................................................ 17 SLAVE MODE ........................................................................................................................................... 18 CONTROL INTERFACE TIMING ................................................................................... 19 DEVICE DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................... 22 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 22 ANALOGUE INPUT SIGNAL PATH ............................................................................... 23 INPUT PGA ENABLE ................................................................................................................................ 24 INPUT PGA CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................ 24 MICROPHONE BIAS CONTROL .............................................................................................................. 25 INPUT PGA GAIN CONTROL ................................................................................................................... 25 DIGITAL MICROPHONE INTERFACE .......................................................................... 27 ANALOGUE-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) ............................................................ 28 ADC VOLUME CONTROL......................................................................................................................... 28 ADC HIGH PASS FILTER ......................................................................................................................... 31 DSP CORE ..................................................................................................................... 32 DSP CONFIGURATION MODES .............................................................................................................. 32 LOW-PASS / HIGH-PASS FILTER (LPF/HPF) .......................................................................................... 33 5-NOTCH FILTER ..................................................................................................................................... 34 DF1 FILTER............................................................................................................................................... 35 TM RETUNE FILTER ................................................................................................................................... 35 5-BAND EQ ............................................................................................................................................... 36 DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL (DRC) ....................................................................................................... 36 SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT REGISTER CONTROLS ................................................................................. 36 DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL (DRC) ........................................................................... 37 DRC COMPRESSION / EXPANSION / LIMITING ..................................................................................... 38 GAIN LIMITS ............................................................................................................................................. 40 GAIN READBACK ..................................................................................................................................... 41 DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................................................................... 42 ANTI-CLIP CONTROL ............................................................................................................................... 43 QUICK-RELEASE CONTROL ................................................................................................................... 44 DRC INITIAL VALUE ................................................................................................................................. 44 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 2 Production Data WM8945 DIGITAL-TO-ANALOGUE CONVERTER (DAC) ............................................................ 45 DAC DIGITAL VOLUME CONTROL.......................................................................................................... 45 DAC AUTO-MUTE ..................................................................................................................................... 48 DAC SLOPING STOPBAND FILTER ........................................................................................................ 48 DIGITAL BEEP GENERATOR ....................................................................................... 49 OUTPUT SIGNAL PATH ................................................................................................ 50 OUTPUT SIGNAL PATHS ENABLE .......................................................................................................... 51 LINE OUTPUT MIXER CONTROL ............................................................................................................ 52 SPEAKER PGA MIXER CONTROL .......................................................................................................... 53 SPEAKER PGA VOLUME CONTROL....................................................................................................... 55 SPEAKER OUTPUT CONTROL................................................................................................................ 57 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS ................................................................................................. 58 LINE OUTPUT ........................................................................................................................................... 58 SPEAKER OUTPUTS................................................................................................................................ 58 EXTERNAL COMPONENTS FOR LINE OUTPUT .................................................................................... 58 LDO REGULATOR ......................................................................................................... 59 REFERENCE VOLTAGES AND MASTER BIAS ........................................................... 61 POP SUPPRESSION CONTROL .................................................................................. 63 DISABLED OUTPUT CONTROL ............................................................................................................... 63 OUTPUT DISCHARGE CONTROL ........................................................................................................... 64 DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE ........................................................................................ 65 MASTER AND SLAVE MODE OPERATION ............................................................................................. 65 AUDIO DATA FORMATS .......................................................................................................................... 66 COMPANDING .......................................................................................................................................... 69 LOOPBACK ............................................................................................................................................... 71 DIGITAL PULL-UP AND PULL-DOWN ...................................................................................................... 71 CLOCKING AND SAMPLE RATES................................................................................ 72 DIGITAL MIC CLOCKING ......................................................................................................................... 75 FREQUENCY LOCKED LOOP (FLL) ........................................................................................................ 75 EXAMPLE FLL CALCULATION................................................................................................................. 78 EXAMPLE FLL SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................ 79 VIDEO BUFFER ............................................................................................................. 80 RECOMMENDED VIDEO BUFFER INITIALISATION SEQUENCE .......................................................... 82 AUXILIARY ADC ............................................................................................................ 83 AUXADC CONTROL ................................................................................................................................. 83 AUXADC INPUT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................................... 84 AUXADC READBACK ............................................................................................................................... 85 TOUCH PANEL CONTROLLER .................................................................................... 86 TOUCH PANEL CONTROL ....................................................................................................................... 86 TOUCH PANEL READBACK..................................................................................................................... 88 TOUCH PANEL OPERATING PRINCIPLES ............................................................................................. 89 GENERAL PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT ........................................................................ 90 GPIO FUNCTION SELECT ....................................................................................................................... 93 INTERRUPTS ................................................................................................................ 95 CONTROL INTERFACE................................................................................................. 97 SELECTION OF CONTROL INTERFACE MODE ..................................................................................... 97 2-WIRE (I2C) CONTROL MODE ............................................................................................................... 98 3-WIRE (SPI) CONTROL MODE ............................................................................................................. 100 4-WIRE (SPI) CONTROL MODE ............................................................................................................. 101 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 3 WM8945 Production Data POWER MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................. 102 THERMAL SHUTDOWN .............................................................................................. 103 POWER ON RESET .................................................................................................... 104 RECOMMENDED POWER UP/DOWN SEQUENCE................................................... 106 SOFTWARE RESET AND DEVICE ID......................................................................... 107 REGISTER MAP ................................................................................................ 108 REGISTER BITS BY ADDRESS .................................................................................. 113 DIGITAL FILTER CHARACTERISTICS ............................................................ 157 TERMINOLOGY ...................................................................................................................................... 157 ADC FILTER RESPONSE............................................................................................ 158 ADC HIGHPASS FILTER RESPONSE ........................................................................ 159 DAC FILTER RESPONSE............................................................................................ 160 APPLICATIONS INFORMATION ...................................................................... 162 RECOMMENDED EXTERNAL COMPONENTS .......................................................... 162 AUDIO INPUT PATHS............................................................................................................................. 162 HEADPHONE / LINE OUTPUT PATHS .................................................................................................. 162 BTL SPEAKER OUTPUT CONNECTION ............................................................................................... 163 POWER SUPPLY DECOUPLING ........................................................................................................... 163 MICROPHONE BIAS CIRCUIT ............................................................................................................... 164 VIDEO BUFFER COMPONENTS............................................................................................................ 165 RECOMMENDED EXTERNAL COMPONENTS DIAGRAM .................................................................... 166 PCB LAYOUT CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................. 166 PACKAGE DIMENSIONS .................................................................................. 167 IMPORTANT NOTICE ....................................................................................... 168 ADDRESS: ................................................................................................................... 168 REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... 169 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 4 Production Data WM8945 BLOCK DIAGRAM w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 5 WM8945 Production Data PIN CONFIGURATION The WM8945 is supplied in a 36-pin CSP format. The pin configuration is illustrated below, showing the top-down view from above the chip. 1 2 3 4 5 6 A SPKVDD LDOVOUT LDOVDD VMIDC YN XP B SPKOUTR SPKOUTL GND XN YP AUX1 DNC ADCDAT MICBIAS AUX2 IN2L C LINEOUTL D VBREFR VBOUT CS/ GPIO2 IN1L/ DMICDAT DNC DNC E VBIN BCLK LRCLK SDOUT/ GPIO4 DCVDD SDA F MCLK DACDAT GPIO1 CIFMODE /GPIO3 DBVDD SCLK ORDERING INFORMATION ORDER CODE TEMPERATURE RANGE PACKAGE MOISTURE SENSITIVITY LEVEL PEAK SOLDERING TEMPERATURE -40C to +85C 36-ball W-CSP (Pb-free, tape and reel) MSL1 260 C WM8945ECS/R o Note: Reel quantity = 3500 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 6 WM8945 Production Data PIN DESCRIPTION PIN NO NAME A1 SPKVDD Supply TYPE Supply for speaker driver DESCRIPTION A2 LDOVOUT Supply LDO output A3 LDOVDD Supply LDO supply input A4 VMIDC A5 Analogue Output Midrail voltage decoupling capacitor YN Analogue Input / Output Touch Panel (bottom) connection A6 XP Analogue Input / Output Touch Panel (right) connection B1 SPKOUTR Analogue Output Right speaker mixer output B2 SPKOUTL Analogue Output Left speaker mixer output B3 GND Supply Ground B4 XN Analogue Input / Output Touch Panel (left) connection B5 YP Analogue Input / Output Touch Panel (top) connection B6 AUX1 Analogue Input Aux input (audio or AUXADC input) C1 LINEOUTL Analogue Output Left line mixer output C2 DNC C3 N/A Do Not Connect ADCDAT Digital Output ADC / Digital Microphone digital audio data C4 MICBIAS Analogue Output Microphone bias C5 AUX2 Analogue Input Aux input (audio or AUXADC input) C6 IN2L Analogue Input Left input 2 D1 VBREFR Analogue Output Video buffer current reference resistor connection D2 VBOUT Analogue Output Video buffer output D3 CS ¯¯ /GPIO2 D4 IN1L/DMICDAT D5 DNC Digital Input / Output Chip Select / GPIO2 Analogue Input / Digital Input Left input 1 / Digital Microphone data input N/A Do Not Connect D6 DNC N/A Do Not Connect E1 VBIN Analogue Input Video buffer input E2 BCLK Digital Input / Output Audio interface bit clock E3 LRCLK Digital Input / Output Audio interface left / right clock E4 SDOUT/GPIO4 Digital Input / Output Control interface data output / GPIO4 E5 DCVDD E6 SDA Supply Digital core supply Digital Input / Output Control interface data input / output F1 MCLK Digital Input Master clock F2 DACDAT Digital Input DAC digital audio data GPIO1 F3 GPIO1 Digital Input / Output F4 CIFMODE/GPIO3 Digital Input / Output Control interface mode select / GPIO3 F5 DBVDD Supply Digital buffer (I/O) supply F6 SCLK Digital Input Control interface clock input w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 7 WM8945 Production Data ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Absolute Maximum Ratings are stress ratings only. Permanent damage to the device may be caused by continuously operating at or beyond these limits. Device functional operating limits and guaranteed performance specifications are given under Electrical Characteristics at the test conditions specified. ESD Sensitive Device. This device is manufactured on a CMOS process. It is therefore generically susceptible to damage from excessive static voltages. Proper ESD precautions must be taken during handling and storage of this device. Wolfson tests its package types according to IPC/JEDEC J-STD-020B for Moisture Sensitivity to determine acceptable storage conditions prior to surface mount assembly. These levels are: MSL1 = unlimited floor life at <30C / 85% Relative Humidity. Not normally stored in moisture barrier bag. MSL2 = out of bag storage for 1 year at <30C / 60% Relative Humidity. Supplied in moisture barrier bag. MSL3 = out of bag storage for 168 hours at <30C / 60% Relative Humidity. Supplied in moisture barrier bag. The Moisture Sensitivity Level for each package type is specified in Ordering Information. MIN MAX Supply voltages (DCVDD) CONDITION -0.3V 2.5V Supply voltages (LDOVDD, DBVDD, SPKVDD) -0.3V 4.5V Voltage range digital inputs -0.7V DBVDD +0.7V Voltage range analogue inputs -0.7V LDOVDD +0.7V Operating temperature range, TA -40ºC +85ºC Junction temperature, TJMAX -40ºC +150ºC Storage temperature after soldering -65ºC +150ºC RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS PARAMETER SYMBOL MIN TYP MAX Digital supply range (Core) DCVDD 1.62 1.8 1.98 UNIT V Digital supply range (I/O) DBVDD 1.71 3.3 3.6 V Analogue supply LDOVDD 2.4 3.3 3.6 V Speaker supply range SPKVDD 1.71 3.3 3.6 V Ground GND 0 V Note: To ensure pop-free device start-up, LDOVDD must be enabled before SPKVDD w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 8 WM8945 Production Data THERMAL PERFORMANCE Thermal analysis should be performed in the intended application to prevent the WM8945 from exceeding maximum junction temperature. Several contributing factors affect thermal performance most notably the physical properties of the mechanical enclosure, location of the device on the PCB in relation to surrounding components and the number of PCB layers. Connecting the GND balls through thermal vias and into a large ground plane will aid heat extraction. Three main heat transfer paths exist to surrounding air as illustrated below in Figure 1: - Package top to air (radiation). - Package bottom to PCB (radiation). - Package balls to PCB (conduction). Figure 1 Heat Transfer Paths The temperature rise TR is given by TR = PD * ӨJA - PD is the power dissipated in the device. - ӨJA is the thermal resistance from the junction of the die to the ambient temperature and is therefore a measure of heat transfer from the die to surrounding air. ӨJA is determined with reference to JEDEC standard JESD51-9. The junction temperature TJ is given by TJ = TA +TR, where TA is the ambient temperature. SYMBOL MIN Operating temperature range PARAMETER TA -40 85 °C Operating junction temperature TJ -40 125 °C Thermal Resistance TYP MAX UNIT ӨJC 30 °C/W ӨJA 60 °C/W (Junction to Case) Thermal Resistance (Junction to Ambient) Notes: 1. Junction temperature is a function of ambient temperature and of the device operating conditions. The ambient temperature limits and junction temperature limits must both be observed. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 9 WM8945 Production Data ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Test Conditions DCVDD = 1.8V, DBVDD = LDOVDD = SPKVDD = 3.3V, LDOVOUT = 3.0V, GND = 0V, o TA = +25 C, 1kHz signal, fs = 48kHz, PGA gain = 0dB, 24-bit audio data unless otherwise stated. PARAMETER SYMBOL TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT Analogue Inputs (IN1L, IN2L) Maximum input signal level (changes in proportion to LDOVOUT) Single-ended input Pseudo-differential input Input resistance (IN1L) Input resistance (IN2L) +35.25dB gain 1.0 Vrms 0 dBV 0.7 Vrms -3.1 dBV 3.5 k 0dB gain 104 k -12dB gain 166 k 96 k 10 pF AUX1 or AUX2 enabled as audio input 1.0 Vrms 0 dBV All gain settings Input capacitance Analogue Inputs (AUX1, AUX2) Maximum input signal level (changes in proportion to LDOVOUT) Input resistance Input mixer path (0dB) 100 k Output mixer / direct speaker path (0dB) 15 k Output mixer / direct speaker path (-6dB) 30 k 10 pF Minimum programmable gain -12 dB Maximum programmable gain 35.25 dB 0.75 dB Input capacitance Analogue Inputs Programmable Gain Amplifiers (PGAs) Gain step size Guaranteed monotonic Mute attenuation 92 dB 110 dB Minimum programmable gain -57 dB Maximum programmable gain 6 dB Common Mode Rejection Ratio 1kHz input Speaker Output Programmable Gain Amplifiers (PGAs) Gain step size Guaranteed monotonic Mute attenuation 1 dB 71 dB ADC Input Path Performance (Input PGAs to ADC) SNR (A-weighted) 84 94 dB THD -1dBFS input -83 -75 dB THD+N -1dBFS input -77 -70 dB 217Hz 77 1kHz 90 PSRR (with respect to LDOVDD) w dB PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 10 WM8945 Production Data PARAMETER SYMBOL TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP 90 98 MAX UNIT Bypass to Line Output (IN2L to Input PGA to Line Output, 10k / 50pF) SNR (A-weighted) PGA Gain = 0dB dB INPPGAVOL = 0dB THD+N PGA Gain = 0dB -89.5 -82 dB INPPGAVOL = 0dB Bypass to Speaker Output (single-ended AUX1, AUX2 to Input PGA to SPKMIX to Speaker Output, 10k / 50pF) SNR (A-weighted) PGA Gain = 0dB 90 96 dB INPPGAVOL = 0dB THD+N PGA Gain = 0dB -86.5 -77 dB INPPGAVOL = 0dB DAC Output Path Performance (DAC to Line Output, 10k / 50pF) Maximum output signal level (changes in proportion to LDOVOUT) 1 SNR (A-weighted) 85 Vrms 96 dB THD -80 -72 dB THD+N -78 -70 dB Mute attenuation 125 dB 217Hz 48 dB 1kHz 60 PSRR (with respect to LDOVDD) Line Output Resistance 10 k Line Output Capacitance 50 pF Maximum output signal level (changes in proportion to LDOVOUT) 1 Vrms SNR (A-weighted) 96 dB THD -78 dB THD+N -76 dB 96 dB DAC Output Path Performance (DAC to Speaker Output, 10k / 50pF) Speaker Output Performance (Speaker Output, 8 BTL) SNR (A-weighted) THD 90 PO=150mW PO=350mW THD+N PO=150mW PO=350mW Mute attenuation 0.03 % -68 dB 2.944 % 30.6 dB 0.05 % -66 dB 3.72 % -28.6 dB 92 dB PSRR (with respect to LDOVDD) 217Hz 48 dB 1kHz 60 PSRR (with respect to SPKVDD) 217Hz 89 1kHz 79 dB Speaker Resistance 8 Speaker Capacitance 50 pF w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 11 WM8945 PARAMETER Production Data SYMBOL TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT AuxADC and Touch Panel Interface Maximum input signal level (changes in proportion to LDOVDD) 3.3 Input leakage current AUX pin not selected as AUXADC input V 10 nA Input resistance 50 Input capacitance 10 pF AUXADC resolution 12 Bits AUXADC conversion time 20.8 s AUXADC accuracy 6 LSB Touch Panel switch matrix resistance 20 Maximum Pen-Down detection sensitivity pullup resistor 55 Touch Pressure current source 63 70 k TCH_ISEL = 0 230 uA TCH_ISEL = 1 460 uA 1.65 V Pen-Down detection threshold (changes in proportion to LDOVDD) Digital Inputs/Outputs Input high level 0.7DBVDD V Input low level Output high level IOL = 1mA Output low level IOH = -1mA 0.3DBVDD V 0.2DBVDD V 0.8DBVDD Input capacitance V 10 Input leakage pF All digital pins except CIFMODE -900 900 nA CIFMODE pin -90 90 nA 3.6 V LDO Regulator Input voltage LDOVDD Output voltage LDOVOUT 2.4 LDO_REF_SEL = 0 Maximum output current (see note) Output voltage accuracy Quiescent current 3.0 V 50 mA ILOAD = 50mA 2 % No Load 55 A 1 A 217Hz 40 dB 1kHz 49 Leakage current PSRR (with respect to LDOVDD) 3.3 Video Buffer Maximum output voltage swing Voltage gain Vom f=100kHz, THD=1% 1.10 1.25 1.50 V pk-pk Av VB_GAIN = 1, RREF=187, RLOAD=75, RSOURCE=75 5.08 6 7.94 dB VB_GAIN = 0, RREF=187, RLOAD=75, RSOURCE=75 -0.92 0 1.94 dB Gain step size 6 dB Differential gain DG Vin = 1V pk-pk -2.0 0.3 +2.0 % Differential phase DP Vin = 1V pk-pk -2.0 0.7 +2.0 Deg 40 60 100 dB SNR w VSNR PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 12 WM8945 Production Data PARAMETER SYMBOL SYNC tip offset above GND TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT VB_PD = 0 0 40 75 mV VB_GAIN = 1 Third order Low Pass Filter response (referenced to 100kHz) 2.4MHz -0.5 0 0.5 dB 5.13MHz -0.5 -0.2 0.5 dB RREF=187, RLOAD=75, RSOURCE=75, 0dB gain 9.04MHz -3.0 -1.6 0 dB 13.32MHz -11.0 -7.0 -3.0 dB PSRR (with respect to LDOVOUT) 100kHz 60 dB Clocking MCLK frequency 30Hz 27MHz Hz FLL output frequency 2.045 50 MHz FLL lock time 2 ms MICBIAS Bias voltage (changes in proportion to LDOVOUT) MICBIAS MICB_LVL = 0 2.7 V MICB_LVL = 1 1.95 V Output noise spectral density 1kHz to 20kHz 15 nV/Hz PSRR (with respect to LDOVDD) 217Hz 70 dB 1kHz 85 VMID_REF_SEL = 1 1.5 Bias Current source 3 mA Analogue Reference Levels Midrail Reference Voltage (changes in proportion to LDOVOUT) Bandgap Reference VMID V VMID_CTRL=1 BG_VSEL=01010 -10% 1.5 +10% V Note: The maximum LDO output current is the total internal and external load capability; internal circuits of the WM8945 will typically account for 25mA of this capacity. TERMINOLOGY 1. Signal-to-Noise Ratio (dB) – SNR is the difference in level between a full scale output signal and the device output noise with no signal applied, measured over a bandwidth of 20Hz to 20kHz. This ratio is also called idle channel noise. (No Auto-zero or Mute function is employed). 2. Total Harmonic Distortion (dB) – THD is the difference in level between a 1kHz reference sine wave output signal and the first seven harmonics of the output signal. The amplitude of the fundamental frequency of the output signal is compared to the RMS value of the next seven harmonics and expressed as a ratio. 3. Total Harmonic Distortion plus Noise (dB) – THD+N is the difference in level between a 1kHz reference sine wave output signal and all noise and distortion products in the audio band. The amplitude of the fundamental reference frequency of the output signal is compared to the RMS value of all other noise and distortion products and expressed as a ratio. 4. Mute Attenuation – This is a measure of the difference in level between the full scale output signal and the output with mute applied. 5. Power Supply Rejection Ratio (dB) – PSRR is a measure of ripple attenuation between a power supply rail and a signal output path. With the signal path idle, a small sine wave ripple is applied to power supply rail. The amplitude of the supply ripple is compared to the amplitude of the output signal generated and is expressed as a ratio. 6. All performance measurements are carried out with 20kHz AES17 low pass filter for distortion measurements, and an A-weighted filter for noise measurement. Failure to use such a filter will result in higher THD and lower SNR and Dynamic Range readings than are found in the Electrical Characteristics. The low pass filter removes out-of-band noise; although it is not audible, it may affect dynamic specification values. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 13 WM8945 Production Data TYPICAL PERFORMANCE W M8945 ADC - THD+N v Ampltiude - ADC - Slave Mode -50 -55 -60 -65 -70 -75 -80 d B F S -85 -90 -95 -100 -105 -110 -115 -120 -110 -100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 +0 -120 dBV WM8945 DAC - THD+N v Ampltiude - DAC to LINEOUT 10kohm -40 -45 -50 -55 -60 -65 -70 -75 d B V -80 -85 -90 -95 -100 -105 -110 -115 -120 -120 -110 -100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20 -10 -30 -20 -10 +0 dBFS Device2_FS=48kHz_10kOhm_DCVDD=1.8_DBVDD=3.3_LDOVDD=3.3_SPKVDD=3.3.at27 WM8945 - DAC to SPKOUT 8ohm BTL THD+N v Amplitude - 48kHz -10 T -20 -30 -40 -50 d B V -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 -110 -120 -120 -110 -100 -90 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 +0 dBFS w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 14 WM8945 Production Data POWER CONSUMPTION Typical power consumption DCVDD LDOVDD SPKVDD 1.8 3.3 3.3 3.3 Powerdown (no data) 0.178 0.062 0.007 0.002 0.267 Powerdown (+Master BIAS) 0.178 0.062 0.021 0.002 0.282 0.603 Powerdown (+Master BIAS+VMID buffer) Powerdown (+Master BIAS+VMID buffer+VMID) 0.178 0.062 0.142 0.002 0.403 1.001 0.178 0.063 1.092 0.002 1.353 4.137 Playback to Lineout (no data) 4.363 0.056 2.173 0.000 6.672 15.211 Video Buffer Only 0.178 0.062 5.088 0.020 5.348 17.380 Touch Panel Only 0.223 0.062 0.257 0.007 0.549 1.477 Playback to Speaker (no data) 4.272 0.057 2.877 4.707 11.647 32.904 Condition DBVDD Total Total Current (mA) Power (mW) 0.555 Playback to Speaker (with data) 4.294 0.062 2.895 4.730 11.696 33.095 Playback to Speaker (with data) 32ohm 4.295 0.062 2.895 5.790 13.042 36.595 Playback to Speaker (with data) 16ohm 4.295 0.062 2.896 6.275 13.528 38.199 Mono Record (nodata) 2.992 0.088 3.728 0.007 6.815 18.001 Mono Record (with data) 2.999 0.100 3.727 0.007 6.833 18.049 Playback and Record (no data) 5.673 0.120 10.054 4.408 20.255 58.333 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 15 WM8945 Production Data AUDIO SIGNAL PATHS DIAGRAM w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 16 WM8945 Production Data SIGNAL TIMING REQUIREMENTS SYSTEM CLOCK TIMING Figure 2 Master Clock Timing Test Conditions o DCVDD = 1.8V, DBVDD = LDOVDD = SPKVDD = 3.3V, LDOVOUT = 3.0V, GND = 0V, TA = +25 C. PARAMETER SYMBOL CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT Master Clock Timing MCLK cycle time 0.037s TMCLKY MCLK duty cycle s 60:40 40:60 (= TMCLKH : TMCLKL) AUDIO INTERFACE TIMING MASTER MODE BCLK (Output) tDL LRCLK (Output) t DDA ADCDAT DACDAT t DST tDHT Figure 3 Audio Interface Timing – Master Mode Test Conditions DCVDD = 1.8V, DBVDD = LDOVDD = SPKVDD = 3.3V, LDOVOUT = 3.0V, GND = 0V, o TA = +25 C, 1kHz signal, fs = 48kHz, PGA gain = 0dB, 24-bit audio data unless otherwise stated. PARAMETER SYMBOL MIN TYP MAX UNIT Audio Interface Timing – Master Mode LRCLK propagation delay from BCLK falling edge tDL 20 ns ADCDAT propagation delay from BCLK falling edge tDDA 20 ns DACDAT setup time to BCLK rising edge tDST 20 ns DACDAT hold time from BCLK rising edge tDHT 10 ns w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 17 WM8945 Production Data SLAVE MODE tBCY BCLK (input) tBCH tBCL LRCLK (input) tLRH tLRSU ADCDAT (output) tDD DACDAT (input) tDS tDH Figure 4 Audio Interface Timing – Slave Mode Test Conditions DCVDD = 1.8V, DBVDD = LDOVDD = SPKVDD = 3.3V, LDOVOUT = 3.0V, GND = 0V, o TA = +25 C, 1kHz signal, fs = 48kHz, PGA gain = 0dB, 24-bit audio data unless otherwise stated. PARAMETER SYMBOL MIN TYP MAX UNIT BCLK cycle time tBCY 50 ns BCLK pulse width high tBCH 20 ns BCLK pulse width low tBCL 20 ns LRCLK set-up time to BCLK rising edge tLRSU 20 ns LRCLK hold time from BCLK rising edge tLRH 10 ns DACDAT hold time from BCLK rising edge tDH 10 ADCDAT propagation delay from BCLK falling edge tDD DACDAT set-up time to BCLK rising edge tDS Audio Interface Timing – Slave Mode ns 20 20 ns ns Note: BCLK period must always be greater than or equal to MCLK period. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 18 WM8945 Production Data CONTROL INTERFACE TIMING Figure 5 Control Interface Timing – 2-wire (I2C) Control Mode Test Conditions DCVDD = 1.8V, DBVDD = LDOVDD = SPKVDD = 3.3V, LDOVOUT = 3.0V, GND = 0V, o TA = +25 C, 1kHz signal, fs = 48kHz, PGA gain = 0dB, 24-bit audio data unless otherwise stated. PARAMETER SYMBOL MIN SCLK Frequency TYP MAX UNIT 400 kHz SCLK Low Pulse-Width t1 1300 ns SCLK High Pulse-Width t2 600 ns Hold Time (Start Condition) t3 600 ns Setup Time (Start Condition) t4 600 ns Data Setup Time t5 100 SDA, SCLK Rise Time t6 300 ns SDA, SCLK Fall Time t7 300 ns Setup Time (Stop Condition) t8 Data Hold Time t9 Pulse width of spikes that will be suppressed tps w ns 600 0 ns 900 ns 5 ns PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 19 WM8945 Production Data Figure 6 Control Interface Timing – 3-wire (SPI) Control Mode (Write Cycle) nd Note: The data is latched on the 32 falling edge of SCLK after 32 bits have been clocked into the device. Figure 7 Control Interface Timing – 3-wire (SPI) Control Mode (Read Cycle) Test Conditions DCVDD = 1.8V, DBVDD = LDOVDD = SPKVDD = 3.3V, LDOVOUT = 3.0V, GND = 0V, o TA = +25 C, 1kHz signal, fs = 48kHz, PGA gain = 0dB, 24-bit audio data unless otherwise stated. SYMBOL MIN CS ¯¯ falling edge to SCLK rising edge PARAMETER tCSU 40 TYP MAX UNIT SCLK falling edge to CS ¯¯ rising edge tCHO 10 ns SCLK pulse cycle time tSCY 200 ns ns SCLK pulse width low tSCL 80 ns SCLK pulse width high tSCH 80 ns SDA to SCLK set-up time tDSU 40 ns SDA to SCLK hold time tDHO 10 Pulse width of spikes that will be suppressed tps 0 SCLK falling edge to SDA output transition tDL w ns 5 ns 40 ns PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 20 WM8945 Production Data Figure 8 Control Interface Timing – 4-wire (SPI) Control Mode (Write Cycle) nd Note: The data is latched on the 32 falling edge of SCLK after 32 bits have been clocked into the device. CS (input) SCLK (input) SDOUT (output) tDL Figure 9 Control Interface Timing – 4-wire (SPI) Control Mode (Read Cycle) Test Conditions DCVDD = 1.8V, DBVDD = LDOVDD = SPKVDD = 3.3V, LDOVOUT = 3.0V, GND = 0V, o TA = +25 C, 1kHz signal, fs = 48kHz, PGA gain = 0dB, 24-bit audio data unless otherwise stated. SYMBOL MIN CS ¯¯ falling edge to SCLK rising edge PARAMETER tCSU 40 TYP MAX UNIT SCLK falling edge to CS rising edge tCHO 10 ns SCLK pulse cycle time tSCY 200 ns ns SCLK pulse width low tSCL 80 ns SCLK pulse width high tSCH 80 ns SDA to SCLK set-up time tDSU 40 ns SDA to SCLK hold time tDHO 10 Pulse width of spikes that will be suppressed tps 0 SCLK falling edge to SDOUT transition tDL w ns 5 ns 40 ns PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 21 WM8945 Production Data DEVICE DESCRIPTION INTRODUCTION The WM8945 is a highly integrated low power hi-fi CODEC designed for portable devices such as digital still cameras and multimedia phones. Flexible analogue interfaces and powerful digital signal processing (DSP) in a 2.96 x 3.06mm footprint make it ideal for small portable devices. The WM8945 supports up to 4 analogue audio inputs. One single-ended or pseudo differential microphone / line input is selected as the ADC input source. The two auxiliary inputs can be selected as line inputs to the ADC, or as direct signal paths to the output mixers. An integrated bias reference is provided to power standard electret microphones. A digital microphone interface is also supported, with direct input to the DSP core via the ADC. The hi-fi ADC and DAC operate at sample rates from 8kHz up to 48kHz. A high pass filter is available in the ADC path for removing DC offsets and suppressing low frequency noise such as mechanical vibration and wind noise. A digital tone (‘beep’) generator allows audio tones to be injected into the DAC output path. The WM8945 provides a powerful DSP capability for configurable filtering and processing of the digital audio path. The DSP provides low-pass / high-pass filtering, notch filters, 5-band EQ, dynamic range control and a programmable DF1 digital filter. The tuned notch filters allow narrow frequency bands to be attenuated, to provide filtering of motor noise or other unwanted sounds; the 5-band EQ allows the signal to be adjusted for user-preferences. The dynamic range control provides a range of compression, limiting and noise gate functions to support optimum configuration for recording or playback modes. The DF1 filter allows user-specified algorithms to be implemented in the digital signal chain. The Wolfson ReTune™ feature is a highly-configurable DSP algorithm which can be tailored to cancel or compensate for imperfect characteristics of the housing, loudspeaker or microphone components in the target application. The ReTune™ algorithm coefficients and register contents are calculated using Wolfson’s WISCE™ software; lab bench tests and audio reference measurements must be performed in order to determine the optimum settings. The digital signal routing between the ADC, DAC and I2S digital audio interface can be configured in different ways according to the application requirements. The DSP functions may be applied to the ADC record path, or the DAC playback path. Three analogue output mixers are provided, connected to 3 analogue output pins. A mono line output and mono BTL headphone/speaker may be connected to these outputs. The WM8945 incorporates an LDO regulator for compatibility with a wide range of supply rails; the internal LDO can also reduce any interference resulting from a noisy supply rail. The LDO regulator can also be used to provide a regulated supply voltage to other circuits. I2C or SPI control interface modes for read/write access to the register map. A single external clock provides timing reference for all the digital functions; an integrated Frequency Locked Loop (FLL) also provides flexibility to perform frequency conversions and to remove noise/jitter from the external clock. The FLL can be configured for reduced power consumption, or for different filtering requirements of the reference source. Additional functions include a 4-wire controller for interface to standard resistive touch panels, a 12-bit auxiliary ADC for DC measurement / battery monitoring, and also a current-mode video buffer providing excellent video signal reproduction at low operating voltages. Up to 4 GPIO pins may be configured for miscellaneous input/output, or for status indications from the Touch panel, AUXADC or temperature monitoring functions. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 22 WM8945 Production Data ANALOGUE INPUT SIGNAL PATH The WM8945 has four analogue input pins, which may be selected in different configurations. The analogue input paths can support line and microphone inputs, in single-ended or pseudo-differential modes. Two of the input pins (AUX1 and AUX2) may be configured either as audio inputs or may be used as inputs to the Auxiliary ADC for analogue measurement or monitoring. The input PGA (PGA_L) is routed to the Analogue to Digital converter (ADC). There is also a bypass path, enabling the signal to be routed directly to the output mixers. The WM8945 input signal paths and control registers are illustrated in Figure 10. Figure 10 Input Signal Paths w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 23 WM8945 Production Data INPUT PGA ENABLE The input PGA (Programmable Gain Amplifiers) is enabled using the register bit INPPGAL_ENA, as described in Table 1. REGISTER ADDRESS R2 (02h) BIT 12 LABEL INPPGAL_ENA DEFAULT 0 Power Management 1 DESCRIPTION Left Input PGA Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Table 1 Input PGA Enable To enable the input PGA, the reference voltage VMID and the bias current must also be enabled. See “Reference Voltages and Master Bias” for details of the associated controls VMID_SEL and BIAS_ENA. INPUT PGA CONFIGURATION Microphone and Line level audio inputs can be connected to the WM8945 in single-ended or differential configurations. (These two configurations are illustrated in Figure 61 and Figure 62 in the section describing the external components requirements – see “Applications Information”.) For single-ended microphone inputs, the microphone signal is connected to the non-inverting input of the PGA, whilst the inverting input of the PGA is connected to VMID. For differential microphone inputs, the non-inverted microphone signal is connected to the non-inverting input of the PGA, whilst the inverted (or ‘noisy ground’) signal is connected to the inverting input pin. Line level inputs are connected in the same way as a single-ended microphone signal. The non-inverting input of the PGA is configured using the P_PGAL_SEL register. This register allows the selection of three possible input pins to the PGA. When the AUX1 or AUX2 pin is used as an audio input, that pin must be configured for audio using the AUX1_AUDIO or AUX2_AUDIO register bits. The inverting input of the PGA is configured using MICLN_TO_N_PGAL. This register allows the PGA to operate in either single-ended or pseudo-differential configuration. The registers for configuring the Input PGA are described in Table 2. REGISTER ADDRESS R39 (27h) BIT 8 LABEL AUX2_AUDIO DEFAULT 0 Input Ctrl DESCRIPTION AUX2 pin configuration 0 = Non-Audio signal 1 = AC-coupled Audio signal 7 AUX1_AUDIO 0 AUX1 pin configuration 0 = Non-Audio signal 1 = AC-coupled Audio signal 4 MICLN_TO_N_ 1 PGAL Left Input PGA Inverting Input Select 0 = Connected to VMID 1 = Connected to IN2L 1:0 P_PGAL_SEL [1:0] 01 Left Input PGA Non-Inverting Input Select 00 = Connected to IN2L 01 = Connected to IN1L 10 = Connected to AUX1 11 = Reserved Table 2 Input PGA Configuration w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 24 WM8945 Production Data MICROPHONE BIAS CONTROL The WM8945 provides a low noise reference voltage suitable for biasing electret condenser (ECM) type microphones via an external resistor. Refer to the “Applications Information” section for recommended components. The MICBIAS voltage is enabled using the MICB_ENA register bit; the voltage can be selected using the MICB_LVL bit, as described in Table 3. REGISTER ADDRESS R2 (02h) BIT 4 LABEL MICB_ENA DEFAULT 0 Power Management 1 R39 (27h) DESCRIPTION Microphone Bias Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 6 MICB_LVL 0 Input Ctrl Microphone Bias Voltage control 0 = 0.9 x LDOVOUT 1 = 0.65 x LDOVOUT Table 3 Microphone Bias Control INPUT PGA GAIN CONTROL The volume control gain for the PGA is adjusted using the PGAL_VOL register field as described in Table 4. The gain range is -12dB to +35.25dB in 0.75dB steps. The gains on the inverting and noninverting inputs to the PGA are always equal. The input PGA can be muted using the PGAL_MUTE mute bit. The PGA_VU bit controls the loading of digital volume control data. The PGAL_VOL control data is only loaded into the respective control register when PGA_VU = 1. To prevent “zipper noise”, a zero-cross function is provided on the input PGA. When this feature is enabled, volume updates will not take place until a zero-crossing is detected. In the case of a long period without zero-crossings, a timeout function is provided. When the zero-cross function is enabled, the volume will update after the timeout period if no earlier zero-cross has occurred. The timeout clock is enabled using TOCLK_ENA. See “Clocking and Sample Rates” for the definition of this bit. Note that the zero-cross function can be supported without TOCLK enabled, but the timeout function will not be provided in this case. The Input PGA volume control register fields are described in Table 4. REGISTER ADDRESS R40 (28h) BIT 8 LABEL PGA_VU DEFAULT 0 Left INP PGA gain ctrl DESCRIPTION Input PGA Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit enables the Left PGA volume to be updated 7 PGAL_ZC 0 Left Input PGA Zero Cross Detector 0 = Change gain immediately 1 = Change gain on zero cross only 6 PGAL_MUTE 1 Left Input PGA Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 5:0 PGAL_VOL [5:0] 01_0000 (0dB) Left Input PGA Volume 00_0000 = -12dB 00_0001 = -11.25dB … 01_0000 = 0dB ... 11_1111 = +35.25 (See Table 5 for volume range) Table 4 Input PGA Volume Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 25 WM8945 Production Data PGAL_VOL[5:0] VOLUME PGAL_VOL[5:0] (dB) 00_0000 VOLUME (dB) -12 10_0000 12 00_0001 -11.25 10_0001 12.75 00_0010 -10.5 10_0010 13.5 00_0011 -9.75 10_0011 14.25 00_0100 -9 10_0100 15 00_0101 -8.25 10_0101 15.75 00_0110 -7.5 10_0110 16.5 00_0111 -6.75 10_0111 17.25 00_1000 -6 10_1000 18 00_1001 -5.25 10_1001 18.75 00_1010 -4.5 10_1010 19.5 00_1011 -3.75 10_1011 20.25 00_1100 -3 10_1100 21 00_1101 -2.25 10_1101 21.75 00_1110 -1.5 10_1110 22.5 00_1111 -0.75 10_1111 23.25 01_0000 0 11_0000 24 01_0001 0.75 11_0001 24.75 01_0010 1.5 11_0010 25.5 01_0011 2.25 11_0011 26.25 01_0100 3 11_0100 27 01_0101 3.75 11_0101 27.75 01_0110 4.5 11_0110 28.5 01_0111 5.25 11_0111 29.25 01_1000 6 11_1000 30 01_1001 6.75 11_1001 30.75 01_1010 7.5 11_1010 31.5 01_1011 8.25 11_1011 32.25 01_1100 9 11_1100 33 01_1101 9.75 11_1101 33.75 01_1110 10.5 11_1110 34.5 11.25 11_1111 35.25 01_1111 Table 5 Input PGA Volume Range w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 26 WM8945 Production Data DIGITAL MICROPHONE INTERFACE The WM8945 supports a digital microphone interface, using the IN1L input pin for data and a GPIO pin for the data clock. The analogue signal path from the IN1L pin must be disabled when using the digital microphone interface; this is achieved by disabling the input PGA, (i.e. INPPGAL_ENA= 0). The Digital Microphone Input, DMICDAT, is provided on the IN1L/DMICDAT pin. The associated clock, DMICCLK, is provided on a GPIO pin. The Digital Microphone Input is selected as input by setting the DMIC_ENA bit. When the Digital Microphone Input is selected, the ADC input is deselected. The digital microphone interface configuration is illustrated in Figure 11. Note that the digital microphone may be powered from MICBIAS or from LDOVOUT; care must be taken to ensure that the respective digital logic levels of the microphone are compatible with the digital input thresholds of the WM8945. The digital input thresholds are referenced to DBVDD, as defined in “Electrical Characteristics”. Figure 11 Digital Microphone Interface When any GPIO pin is configured as DMICCLK output, the WM8945 outputs a clock which supports Digital Mic operation at the ADC sampling rate. The ADC and Record Path filters must be enabled and the ADC sampling rate must be set in order to ensure correct operation of all DSP functions associated with the digital microphone. Volume control for the Digital Microphone Interface signals is provided using the ADC Volume Control. See “Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC)” for details of the ADC Enable and volume control functions. See “General Purpose Input / Output” for details of configuring the DMICCLK output. See “Clocking and Sample Rates” for the details of the sample rate control. When the DMIC_ENA bit is set, then the IN1L pin is used as the digital microphone input DMICDAT. The interface requires that the digital microphone transmits a data bit each time that DMICCLK is high. The WM8945 samples the data in the middle of the ‘high’ DMICCLK clock phase. DMICCLK pin hi-Z MIC output DMICDAT pin Figure 12 Digital Microphone Interface Timing w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 27 WM8945 Production Data The digital microphone interface control fields are described in Table 6. REGISTER ADDRESS R2 (02h) BIT 7 LABEL DMIC_ENA DEFAULT 0 Power Management 1 DESCRIPTION Enables Digital Microphone mode 0 = Audio DSP input is from ADC 1 = Audio DSP input is from digital microphone interface When DMIC_ENA = 0, the Digital microphone clock (DMICCLK) is held low. Table 6 Digital Microphone Interface Control ANALOGUE-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) The WM8945 uses a 24-bit sigma-delta ADC. The use of multi-bit feedback and high oversampling rates reduces the effects of jitter and high frequency noise. The ADC full-scale input level is proportional to LDOVOUT. See “Electrical Characteristics” section for further details. Any input signal greater than full scale may overload the ADC and cause distortion. The ADCs and associated digital record filters are enabled by the ADCL_ENA register bit. REGISTER ADDRESS R2 (02h) BIT 10 LABEL ADCL_ENA DEFAULT 0 Power Management 1 DESCRIPTION Left ADC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled ADCL_ENA must be set to 1 when processing left channel data from the ADC or Digital Microphone. Table 7 ADC Enable Control ADC VOLUME CONTROL The output of the ADC can be digitally amplified or attenuated over a range from -71.625dB to +23.625dB in 0.375dB steps. The volume of each channel is controlled using ADCL_VOL. The ADC Volume is part of the ADC Digital Filters block. The gain for a given eight-bit code X is given by: 0.375 (X-192) dB for 1 X 255; MUTE for X = 0 The ADC_VU bit controls the loading of digital volume control data. The ADCL_VOL control data is only loaded into the respective control register when ADC_VU = 1. The output of the ADC can be digitally muted using the ADCL_MUTE or ADC_MUTEALL bits. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 28 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R25 (19h) BIT 8 LABEL ADC_MUTEALL DEFAULT 0 ADC Control 1 DESCRIPTION ADC Digital Mute for All Channels 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute on all channels R27 (1Bh) 12 ADC_VU 0 Left ADC Digital Vol ADC Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit enables the Left ADC volume to be updated 8 ADCL_MUTE 0 Left ADC Digital Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 7:0 ADCL_VOL [7:0] 1100_0000 (0dB) Left ADC Digital Volume 0000_0000 = mute 0000_0001 = -71.625dB 0000_0010 = -71.250dB … 1100_0000 = 0dB ... 1111_1111 = +23.625dB (See Table 9 for volume range) Table 8 ADC Digital Volume Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 29 WM8945 Production Data ADCL_VOL Volume (dB) ADCL_VOL Volume (dB) ADCL_VOL Volume (dB) ADCL_VOL Volume (dB) 0h 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 6h 7h 8h 9h Ah Bh Ch Dh Eh Fh 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 1Ah 1Bh 1Ch 1Dh 1Eh 1Fh 20h 21h 22h 23h 24h 25h 26h 27h 28h 29h 2Ah 2Bh 2Ch 2Dh 2Eh 2Fh 30h 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 37h 38h 39h 3Ah 3Bh 3Ch 3Dh 3Eh 3Fh MUTE -71.625 -71.250 -70.875 -70.500 -70.125 -69.750 -69.375 -69.000 -68.625 -68.250 -67.875 -67.500 -67.125 -66.750 -66.375 -66.000 -65.625 -65.250 -64.875 -64.500 -64.125 -63.750 -63.375 -63.000 -62.625 -62.250 -61.875 -61.500 -61.125 -60.750 -60.375 -60.000 -59.625 -59.250 -58.875 -58.500 -58.125 -57.750 -57.375 -57.000 -56.625 -56.250 -55.875 -55.500 -55.125 -54.750 -54.375 -54.000 -53.625 -53.250 -52.875 -52.500 -52.125 -51.750 -51.375 -51.000 -50.625 -50.250 -49.875 -49.500 -49.125 -48.750 -48.375 40h 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 46h 47h 48h 49h 4Ah 4Bh 4Ch 4Dh 4Eh 4Fh 50h 51h 52h 53h 54h 55h 56h 57h 58h 59h 5Ah 5Bh 5Ch 5Dh 5Eh 5Fh 60h 61h 62h 63h 64h 65h 66h 67h 68h 69h 6Ah 6Bh 6Ch 6Dh 6Eh 6Fh 70h 71h 72h 73h 74h 75h 76h 77h 78h 79h 7Ah 7Bh 7Ch 7Dh 7Eh 7Fh -48.000 -47.625 -47.250 -46.875 -46.500 -46.125 -45.750 -45.375 -45.000 -44.625 -44.250 -43.875 -43.500 -43.125 -42.750 -42.375 -42.000 -41.625 -41.250 -40.875 -40.500 -40.125 -39.750 -39.375 -39.000 -38.625 -38.250 -37.875 -37.500 -37.125 -36.750 -36.375 -36.000 -35.625 -35.250 -34.875 -34.500 -34.125 -33.750 -33.375 -33.000 -32.625 -32.250 -31.875 -31.500 -31.125 -30.750 -30.375 -30.000 -29.625 -29.250 -28.875 -28.500 -28.125 -27.750 -27.375 -27.000 -26.625 -26.250 -25.875 -25.500 -25.125 -24.750 -24.375 80h 81h 82h 83h 84h 85h 86h 87h 88h 89h 8Ah 8Bh 8Ch 8Dh 8Eh 8Fh 90h 91h 92h 93h 94h 95h 96h 97h 98h 99h 9Ah 9Bh 9Ch 9Dh 9Eh 9Fh A0h A1h A2h A3h A4h A5h A6h A7h A8h A9h AAh ABh ACh ADh AEh AFh B0h B1h B2h B3h B4h B5h B6h B7h B8h B9h BAh BBh BCh BDh BEh BFh -24.000 -23.625 -23.250 -22.875 -22.500 -22.125 -21.750 -21.375 -21.000 -20.625 -20.250 -19.875 -19.500 -19.125 -18.750 -18.375 -18.000 -17.625 -17.250 -16.875 -16.500 -16.125 -15.750 -15.375 -15.000 -14.625 -14.250 -13.875 -13.500 -13.125 -12.750 -12.375 -12.000 -11.625 -11.250 -10.875 -10.500 -10.125 -9.750 -9.375 -9.000 -8.625 -8.250 -7.875 -7.500 -7.125 -6.750 -6.375 -6.000 -5.625 -5.250 -4.875 -4.500 -4.125 -3.750 -3.375 -3.000 -2.625 -2.250 -1.875 -1.500 -1.125 -0.750 -0.375 C0h C1h C2h C3h C4h C5h C6h C7h C8h C9h CAh CBh CCh CDh CEh CFh D0h D1h D2h D3h D4h D5h D6h D7h D8h D9h DAh DBh DCh DDh DEh DFh E0h E1h E2h E3h E4h E5h E6h E7h E8h E9h EAh EBh ECh EDh EEh EFh F0h F1h F2h F3h F4h F5h F6h F7h F8h F9h FAh FBh FCh FDh FEh FFh 0.000 0.375 0.750 1.125 1.500 1.875 2.250 2.625 3.000 3.375 3.750 4.125 4.500 4.875 5.250 5.625 6.000 6.375 6.750 7.125 7.500 7.875 8.250 8.625 9.000 9.375 9.750 10.125 10.500 10.875 11.250 11.625 12.000 12.375 12.750 13.125 13.500 13.875 14.250 14.625 15.000 15.375 15.750 16.125 16.500 16.875 17.250 17.625 18.000 18.375 18.750 19.125 19.500 19.875 20.250 20.625 21.000 21.375 21.750 22.125 22.500 22.875 23.250 23.625 Table 9 ADC Digital Volume Range w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 30 WM8945 Production Data ADC HIGH PASS FILTER A digital high-pass filter can be applied by default to the ADC path to remove DC offsets. This filter can also be programmed to remove low frequency noise in handheld applications (e.g. wind noise, handling noise or mechanical vibration). This filter is controlled using the ADC_HPF and ADC_HPF_CUT register bits (see Table 10). Note that the ADC HPF is NOT enabled by default but must be used if DRC_ENA is enabled in register R29(1Dh) bit 7. The DRC will not function correctly unless this filter is enabled. When ADC_HPF_CUT=00, the high pass filter is optimised for hi-fi audio modes; the filter is designed to remove DC offsets without degrading the bass response and has a cut-off frequency of 3.7Hz at fs=44.1kHz. In the other ADC_HPF_CUT modes. The high pass filter is optimised for voice communication modes. It is recommended to select a cut-off frequency below 300Hz; the preferred setting may vary according to the voice communication sample rate. (e.g. ADC_HPF_CUT=11 at fs=8kHz or ADC_HPF_CUT=10 at fs=16kHz). REGISTER ADDRESS R26 (1Ah) BIT LABEL DEFAULT 2:1 ADC_HPF_CUT [1:0] 00 ADC Control 2 DESCRIPTION High pass filter configuration. st 00 = 1 order HPF (fc=4Hz at fs=48kHz) nd 01 = 2 order HPF (fc=122Hz at fs=48kHz) nd 10 = 2 order HPF (fc=153Hz at fs=48kHz) nd 11 = 2 order HPF (fc=196Hz at fs=48kHz) (See Table 11 for cut-off frequencies at all supported sample rates) ADC_HPF 0 0 ADC Digital High Pass Filter Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Table 10 ADC High-pass Filter Control Registers Value of ADC_HPF_CUT bits Sample Rate (kHz) 00 01 10 11 Cut-off frequency (Hz) 8.000 0.7 20 26 33 11.025 0.9 28 36 45 16.000 1.3 41 51 66 22.050 1.9 56 71 90 24.000 2.0 61 77 98 32.000 2.7 81 102 131 44.100 3.7 112 141 180 48.000 4.0 122 153 196 Table 11 ADC High-pass Filter Cut-off Frequencies Filter response plots for the ADC high-pass filter are shown in “Digital Filter Characteristics”. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 31 WM8945 Production Data DSP CORE DSP Core is at the centre of the ADC / DAC / Digital Audio Interface (I2S) blocks. It provides signal routing, and also implements a number of configurable signal processing functions. The signal processing functions are arranged in three blocks, as follows: Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) – Low-pass / High-pass filter, 5 notch filters, generic ‘DirectForm 1’ filter. Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) – ReTune™ processing, 5-band equalizer. Signal Enhancement 3 (SE3) – Dynamic range control The DSP Configuration modes and each of the Signal Enhancement blocks is described in the following sections. DSP CONFIGURATION MODES The DSP Configuration Mode is determined using the SE_CONFIG register field; this configures the signal paths between the Signal Enhancement blocks and the ADC / DAC / I2S interfaces. The supported DSP modes are illustrated in Figure 13. SE1 (LPF/HPF, 5-notch, DF1) ADC L SE1 (LPF/HPF, 5-notch, DF1) DAC L SE2 (HPF, Re-Tune, 5-band EQ) ADC L SE2 (HPF, Re-Tune, 5-band EQ) SE3 (Dynamic Range Control) DAC L SE3 (Dynamic Range Control) DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE DSP Record Mode DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE DSP Playback Mode Figure 13 DSP Configuration Modes w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 32 WM8945 Production Data Record mode enables the entire set of Signal Enhancement functions in the ADC path. The direct DAC path is also active, without any Signal Enhancement functions; this allows basic audio playback and digital beep generation. Playback mode enables the entire set of DSP functions in the DAC path. The direct ADC path is also active, without any DSP functions; this allows basic audio record functions to the host system. REGISTER ADDRESS R64 (40h) BIT LABEL 3:0 SE_CONFIG [3:0] SE Config Selection DEFAULT 0000 DESCRIPTION DSP Configuration Mode select 0000 = Record mode 0001 = Playback mode 0010 = Reserved 0011 = Reserved Table 12 DSP Configuration Mode Select LOW-PASS / HIGH-PASS FILTER (LPF/HPF) The Low-pass / High-pass filter is part of the SE1 block. This first-order filter can be configured to be high-pass, low-pass; it can also be bypassed. The cut-off frequency is programmable; the default setting is bypass (OFF). The filter is enabled using the SE1_LHPF_L_ENA register bit defined in Table 13. For the derivation of the other associated registers, refer to the configuration tools supplied with the WM8945 Evaluation Kit. Example plots of the Low-pass / High-pass filter response are shown in Figure 14. 3 0 -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -21 -24 -27 20 39.91 79.62 158.9 317 632.5 1.262k 2.518k 5.024k 10.02k 1kLPF.res Magnitude(dB) 1kHPF.res Magnitude(dB) 5kLPF.res Magnitude(dB) 5kHPF.res Magnitude(dB) 200LPF.res Magnitude(dB) 200HPF.res Magnitude(dB) 20k Figure 14 Low-pass / High-pass Filter Responses w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 33 WM8945 Production Data 5-NOTCH FILTER The 5-notch filter is part of the SE1 block. This function allows up to 5 programmable frequency bands to be attenuated. The frequency and width of each notch is configurable; the depth of the attenuation may also be adjusted. The default setting is bypass (OFF). The notch filters are enabled using the SE1_NOTCH_L_ENA register bit defined in Table 13. For the derivation of the other associated registers, refer to the configuration tools supplied with the WM8945 Evaluation Kit. Typical applications for the notch filters are filtering of fixed-frequency noise or resonances; these might arise from a motor (e.g. DSC zoom lens motor) or from characteristics of the application housing. Example plots of the Notch filter response are shown in Figure 15. Notch Response - Slave Mode - fc=1kHz, fb=100, 500, 1k, 5k, 10kHz Depth=100% Notch Response - Slave Mode - fc=1kHz, fb=1kHz Depth 0 to 100% +0 +0 -10 -20 -30 -30 -40 d B V d B V -50 -60 -70 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -80 -90 -100 T -10 -20 -90 520 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 1k 1.2k -100 20 1.5k Hz 50 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k Hz 1kHz notch, 100% depth, bandwidth 100Hz, 500Hz, 1kHz, 5kHz, 10kHz 1kHz notch, bandwidth 1kHz, depth 0% to 100% in 20% steps Notch Response - Slave Mode - fc=200, 500, 1k, 2k, 5k, 10kHz, fb=fc/2, Depth 100% +0 -10 T -20 -30 d B V -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 100 200 500 1k 2k 5k 10k 20k Hz 5 notches, bandwidth Fcentre/2, depth 100% Figure 15 Notch Filter Responses w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 34 WM8945 Production Data DF1 FILTER The DF1 filter is part of the SE1 block. This provides a direct-form 1 standard filter, as illustrated in Figure 16. The default coefficients give a transparent filter response. Figure 16 Direct-Form 1 Standard Filter Structure The DF1 response is defined by the following equations: y[n] c1 x[n] c2 x[n 1] c3 y[n 1] H y c1 c2 z 1 x 1 c3 z 1 The DF1 filter is enabled using the SE1_DF1_L_ENA register bit defined in Table 13. For the derivation of the other associated registers, refer to the configuration tools supplied with the WM8945 Evaluation Kit. The DF1 filter can be used to implement very complex response patterns, with specific phase and gain responses at different frequencies. Typical applications of this type of filter include the application of refinements or other user-selected filters. TM RETUNE FILTER The ReTune™ filter is part of the SE2 block. This is a very advanced feature that is intended to perform frequency linearization according to the particular needs of the application microphone, loudspeaker or housing. The ReTune™ algorithms can provide acoustic equalisation and selective phase (delay) control of specific frequency bands. The ReTune™ filters are enabled using the SE2_RETUNE_L_ENA register bit defined in Table 14. For the derivation of the other ReTune™ configuration parameters, the Wolfson WISCE™ software must be used to analyse the requirements of the application. (Refer to WISCE for further information.) If desired, one or more sets of register coefficients might be derived for different operating scenarios, and these may be recalled and written to the CODEC registers as required in the target application. The ReTune™ configuration procedure involves the generation and analysis of test signals as outlined below. To determine the characteristics of the microphone in an application, a test signal is applied to a loudspeaker that is in the acoustic path to the microphone. The received signal through the application microphone is analysed and compared with the received signal from a reference microphone in order to determine the characteristics of the application microphone. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 35 WM8945 Production Data To determine the characteristics of the loudspeaker in an application, a test signal is applied to the target application. A reference microphone is positioned in the normal acoustic path of the loudspeaker, and the received signal is analysed to determine how accurately the loudspeaker has reproduced the test signal. 5-BAND EQ ReTuneTM 5-band EQ Signal Enhancement Block 2 (SE2) The 5-band EQ is part of the SE2 block. This function allows 5 frequency bands to be controlled. The upper and lower frequency bands are controlled by low-pass and high-pass filters respectively. The middle three frequency bands are notch filters. The cut-off / centre frequency of each filter is programmable, and up to 12dB gain or attenuation can be selected in each case. The 5-band EQ is enabled using the SE2_5BEQ_L_ENA register bit defined in Table 14. For the derivation of the other associated registers, refer to the WISCE software. Typical applications of the 5-band EQ include the selection of user-preferences for different music types, such as ‘rock’, ‘dance’ or ‘classical’ EQ profiles. DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL (DRC) DRC Signal Enhancement Block 3 (SE3) The Dynamic Range Control (DRC) forms the SE3 block. The DRC provides a range of compression, limiting and noise gate functions to support optimum configuration for recording or playback modes. The DRC is configured using the control fields in registers R29 to R35 – see “Dynamic Range Control”. SIGNAL ENHANCEMENT REGISTER CONTROLS The SE1 ‘enable’ bits are described in Table 13. Note that other control fields must also be determined and written to the WM8945 using WISCE™ or other tools. The registers described below only allow the sub-blocks of SE1 to be enabled or disabled. Note that it is not recommended to access these control fields unless appropriate values have been written to the associated bits in registers R65 to R95. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 36 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT R65 (41h) 0 SE1_LHPF_ LABEL SE1_LHPF_L DEFAULT 0 _ENA DESCRIPTION SE1 Left channel low-pass / highpass filter enable 0 = Disabled CONFIG 1 = Enabled R71 (47h) 0 SE1_NOTCH_ CONFIG SE1_NOTCH_L_ ENA 0 SE1 Left channel notch filters enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R92 (5Ch) 0 SE1_DF1_ SE1_DF1_L 0 SE1 Left channel DF1 filter enable 0 = Disabled _ENA 1 = Enabled CONFIG Table 13 Signal Enhancement Block 1 (SE1) The SE2 ‘enable’ bits are described in Table 14. Note that (with the exception of the SE2 HPF) other control fields must also be determined and written to the WM8945 using WISCE™ or other tools. The registers described below only allow the sub-blocks of SE2 to be enabled or disabled. Note that it is not recommended to access these control fields unless appropriate values have been written to the associated bits in registers R99 to R175. REGISTER ADDRESS BIT LABEL DEFAULT 0 SE2_RETUNE_ L_ENA 0 R100 (64h) SE2_RETUNE _CONFIG DESCRIPTION SE2 Left channel ReTune™ filter enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R133 (85h) SE2_5BEQ_ 0 SE2_5BEQ_L _ENA CONFIG 0 SE2 Left channel 5-band EQ enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Table 14 Signal Enhancement Block 2 (SE2) The register controls for Signal Enhancement Block SE3 are defined in the “Dynamic Range Control (DRC)” section. DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL (DRC) The dynamic range controller (DRC) is a circuit which can be enabled in the digital playback or digital record path of the WM8945, depending upon the selected DSP mode. The function of the DRC is to adjust the signal gain in conditions where the input amplitude is unknown or varies over a wide range, e.g. when recording from microphones built into a handheld system. The DRC can apply Compression and Automatic Level Control to the signal path. It incorporates ‘anticlip’ and ‘quick release’ features for handling transients in order to improve intelligibility in the presence of loud impulsive noises. The DRC also incorporates a Noise Gate function, which provides additional attenuation of very lowlevel input signals. This means that the signal path is quiet when no signal is present, giving an improvement in background noise level under these conditions. The DRC is enabled as described in Table 15. The audio signal path controlled by the DRC depends upon the selected DSP Configuration mode – see “DSP Core” for details. To remove any dc offsets from the input signal the ADC high pass filter must be enabled. The DRC will not function correctly unless this filter is enabled. Note that the ADC HPF bit in register R26(1Ah) bit 0 is NOT enabled by default but MUST be used if DRC_ENA is enabled in register R29(1Dh) bit 7. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 37 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R29 (1Dh) BIT LABEL 7 DRC_ENA DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION DRC Enable 0 = Disabled DRC Control 1 1 = Enabled Table 15 DRC Enable DRC COMPRESSION / EXPANSION / LIMITING The DRC supports two different compression regions, separated by a “Knee” (shown as “Knee1” in Figure 17) at a specific input amplitude. In the region above the knee, the compression slope DRC_HI_COMP applies; in the region below the knee, the compression slope DRC_LO_COMP applies. The DRC also supports a noise gate region, where low-level input signals are heavily attenuated. This function can be enabled or disabled according to the application requirements. The DRC response in this region is defined by the expansion slope DRC_NG_EXP. For additional attenuation of signals in the noise gate region, an additional “knee” can be defined (shown as “Knee2” in Figure 17). When this knee is enabled, this introduces an infinitely steep dropoff in the DRC response pattern between the DRC_LO_COMP and DRC_NG_EXP regions. DR C_ NG _E XP The overall DRC compression characteristic in “steady state” (i.e. where the input amplitude is nearconstant) is illustrated in Figure 17. Figure 17 DRC Response Characteristic The slope of the DRC response is determined by register fields DRC_HI_COMP and DRC_LO_COMP. A slope of 1 indicates constant gain in this region. A slope less than 1 represents compression (i.e. a change in input amplitude produces only a smaller change in output amplitude). A slope of 0 indicates that the target output amplitude is the same across a range of input amplitudes; this is infinite compression. When the noise gate is enabled, the DRC response in this region is determined by the DRC_NG_EXP register. A slope of 1 indicates constant gain in this region. A slope greater than 1 represents expansion (i.e. A change in input amplitude produces a larger change in output amplitude). When the DRC_KNEE2_OP knee is enabled (“Knee2” in Figure 17), this introduces the vertical line in the response pattern illustrated, resulting in infinitely steep attenuation at this point in the response. The DRC parameters are listed in Table 16. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 38 WM8945 Production Data REF PARAMETER DESCRIPTION 1 DRC_KNEE_IP Input level at Knee1 (dB) 2 DRC_KNEE_OP Output level at Knee1 (dB) 3 DRC_HI_COMP Compression ratio above Knee1 4 DRC_LO_COMP Compression ratio below Knee1 5 DRC_KNEE2_IP Input level at Knee2 (dB) 6 DRC_NG_EXP Expansion ratio below Knee2 7 DRC_KNEE2_OP Output level at Knee2 (dB) Table 16 DRC Response Parameters The noise gate is enabled when the DRC_NG_ENA register is set. When the noise gate is not enabled, parameters 5, 6, 7 above are ignored, and the DRC_LO_COMP slope applies to all input signal levels below Knee1. The DRC_KNEE2_OP knee is enabled when the DRC_KNEE2_OP_ENA register is set. When this bit is not set, then parameter 7 above is ignored, and the Knee2 position always coincides with the low end of the DRC_LO_COMP region. The “Knee1” point in Figure 17 is determined by register fields DRC_KNEE_IP and DRC_KNEE_OP. Parameter Y0, the output level for a 0dB input, is not specified directly, but can be calculated from the other parameters, using the equation: The DRC Compression / Expansion / Limiting parameters are defined in Table 17. REGISTER ADDRESS R29 (1Dh) BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 DRC_NG_ENA 0 DRC Control 1 DESCRIPTION DRC Noise Gate Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R32 (20h) 12:8 DRC_KNEE2_IP 000000 DRC Control 4 Input signal level at the Noise Gate threshold ‘Knee2’. 00000 = -36dB 00001 = -37.5dB 00010 = -39dB … (-1.5dB steps) 11110 = -81dB 11111 = -82.5dB Only applicable when DRC_NG_ENA = 1. 7:2 DRC_KNEE_IP 000000 Input signal level at the Compressor ‘Knee1’. 000000 = 0dB 000001 = -0.75dB 000010 = -1.5dB … (-0.75dB steps) 111100 = -45dB 111101 = Reserved 11111X = Reserved R33 (21h) DRC Control 5 13 DRC_KNEE2_OP _ENA 0 DRC_KNEE2_OP Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 39 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT 12:8 LABEL DRC_KNEE2_OP DEFAULT 00000 DESCRIPTION Output signal at the Noise Gate threshold ‘Knee2’. 00000 = -30dB 00001 = -31.5dB 00010 = -33dB … (-1.5dB steps) 11110 = -75dB 11111 = -76.5dB Only applicable when DRC_KNEE2_OP_ENA = 1. 7:3 DRC_KNEE_OP 00000 Output signal at the Compressor ‘Knee1’. 00000 = 0dB 00001 = -0.75dB 00010 = -1.5dB … (-0.75dB steps) 11110 = -22.5dB 11111 = Reserved 2:0 DRC_HI_COMP 011 Compressor slope (upper region) 000 = 1 (no compression) 001 = 1/2 010 = 1/4 011 = 1/8 100 = 1/16 101 = 0 110 = Reserved 111 = Reserved R35 (23h) 9:8 DRC_NG_EXP 00 DRC Control 7 Noise Gate slope 00 = 1 (no expansion) 01 = 2 10 = 4 11 = 8 7:5 DRC_LO_COMP 000 Compressor slope (lower region) 000 = 1 (no compression) 001 = 1/2 010 = 1/4 011 = 1/8 100 = 0 101 = Reserved 11X = Reserved Table 17 DRC Control Registers GAIN LIMITS The minimum and maximum gain applied by the DRC is set by register fields DRC_MINGAIN, DRC_MAXGAIN and DRC_NG_MINGAIN. These limits can be used to alter the DRC response from that illustrated in Figure 17. If the range between maximum and minimum gain is reduced, then the extent of the dynamic range control is reduced. The minimum gain in the Compression regions of the DRC response is set by DRC_MINGAIN. The minimum gain in the Noise Gate region is set by DRC_NG_MINGAIN. The minimum gain limit prevents excessive attenuation of the signal path. The maximum gain limit set by DRC_MAXGAIN prevents quiet signals (or silence) from being excessively amplified. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 40 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R30 (1Eh) BIT 12:9 DRC Control 2 LABEL DEFAULT DRC_NG_ 0110 MINGAIN [3:0] DESCRIPTION Minimum gain the DRC can use to attenuate audio signals when the noise gate is active. 0000 = -36dB 0001 = -30dB 0010 = -24dB 0011 = -18dB 0100 = -12dB 0101 = -6dB 0110 = 0dB 0111 = 6dB 1000 = 12dB 1001 = 18dB 1010 = 24dB 1011 = 30dB 1100 = 36dB 1101 to 1111 = Reserved 4:2 DRC_MINGAIN [2:0] 001 Minimum gain the DRC can use to attenuate audio signals 000 = 0dB 001 = -12dB (default) 010 = -18dB 011 = -24dB 100 = -36dB 101 = Reserved 11X = Reserved 1:0 DRC_MAXGAIN [1:0] 01 Maximum gain the DRC can use to boost audio signals (dB) 00 = 12dB 01 = 18dB 10 = 24dB 11 = 36dB Table 18 DRC Gain Limits GAIN READBACK The gain applied by the DRC can be read from the DRC_GAIN register. This is a 16-bit, fixed-point value, which expresses the DRC gain as a voltage multiplier. DRC_GAIN is coded as a fixed-point quantity, with an MSB weighting of 64. The first 7 bits represent the integer portion; the remaining bits represent the fractional portion. If desired, the value of this field may be interpreted by treating DRC_GAIN as an integer value, and dividing the result by 512, as illustrated in the following examples: DRC_GAIN = 05D4 (hex) = 1380 (decimal) Divide by 512 gives 2.914 voltage gain, or 4.645dB DRC_GAIN = 0100 (hex) = 256 (decimal) Divide by 512 gives 0.5 voltage gain, or -3.01dB The DRC_GAIN register is defined in Table 19. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 41 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R36 (24h) BIT 15:0 DRC Status LABEL DEFAULT DRC_GAIN [15:0] DESCRIPTION DRC Gain value. This is the DRC gain, expressed as a voltage multiplier. Fixed point coding, MSB = 64. The first 7 bits are the integer portion; the remaining bits are the fractional part. Table 19 DRC Gain Readback DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS The dynamic behaviour determines how quickly the DRC responds to changing signal levels. Note that the DRC responds to the average (RMS) signal amplitude over a period of time. The DRC_ATK determines how quickly the DRC gain decreases when the signal amplitude is high. The DRC_DCY determines how quickly the DRC gain increases when the signal amplitude is low. These register fields are described in Table 20. Note that the register defaults are suitable for general purpose microphone use. REGISTER ADDRESS R31 (1Fh) BIT 7:4 LABEL DRC_ATK [3:0] DEFAULT 0100 DRC Control 3 DESCRIPTION Attack rate relative to input signal (seconds/6dB) 0000 = Reserved 0001 = 181us 0010 = 363us 0011 = 726us 0100 = 1.45ms 0101 = 2.9ms 0110 = 5.8ms 0111 = 11.6ms 1000 = 23.2ms 1001 = 46.4ms 1010 = 92.8ms 1011 = 185.6ms 1100-1111 = Reserved 3:0 DRC_DCY [3:0] 0010 Decay rate relative to input signal (seconds/6dB) 0000 = 186ms 0001 = 372ms 0010 = 743ms 0011 = 1.49s 0100 = 2.97s 0101 = 5.94s 0110 = 11.89s 0111 = 23.78s 1000 = 47.56s 1001-1111 = Reserved Table 20 DRC Time Constants Under the following conditions, it is possible to predict the attack times with an input sine wave: w Decay rate is set at least 8 times the attack rate. Attack time * input frequency > 1 PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 42 WM8945 Production Data To estimate the attack time for 10%-90%: Attack Time = Register Value * 2.24 For example, if DRC_ATK = 1.45ms/6dB, then the attack time for 10%-90% = 1.45ms * 2.24 = 3.25ms. The decay time for 10%-90% can be estimated using the graph in Figure 18. Figure 18 Decay Time for 10%-90% vs Register Value Decay Rate The decay rate register value read from the horizontal axis and the decay time for 10%-90% read from the vertical axis. For example, if DRC DRC_DCY = 743ms/6dB, then the estimate decay time for 10%-90% taken from the graph is 1.0s. ANTI-CLIP CONTROL The DRC includes an Anti-Clip feature to avoid signal clipping when the input amplitude rises very quickly. This feature uses a feed-forward technique for early detection of a rising signal level. Signal clipping is avoided by dynamically increasing the gain attack rate when required. The Anti-Clip feature is enabled using the DRC_ANTICLIP bit. Note that the feed-forward processing increases the latency in the input signal path. The DRC AntiClip control is described in Table 21. REGISTER ADDRESS R29 (1Dh) BIT LABEL DEFAULT 1 DRC_ANTICLIP 1 DRC Control 1 DESCRIPTION DRC Anti-clip Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Table 21 DRC Anti-Clip Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 43 WM8945 Production Data Note that the Anti-Clip feature operates entirely in the digital domain. It cannot be used to prevent signal clipping in the analogue domain nor in the source signal. Analogue clipping can only be prevented by reducing the analogue signal gain or by adjusting the source signal. The Anti-Clip and Quick Release features should not be used at the same time. QUICK-RELEASE CONTROL The DRC includes a Quick-Release feature to handle short transient peaks that are not related to the intended source signal. For example, in handheld microphone recording, transient signal peaks sometimes occur due to user handling, key presses or accidental tapping against the microphone. The Quick Release feature ensures that these transients do not cause the intended signal to be masked by the longer time constants of DRC_DCY. The Quick-Release feature is enabled by setting the DRC_QR bit. When this bit is enabled, the DRC measures the crest factor (peak to RMS ratio) of the input signal. A high crest factor is indicative of a transient peak that may not be related to the intended source signal. If the crest factor exceeds the level set by DRC_QR_THR, then the normal decay rate (DRC_DCY) is ignored and a faster decay rate (DRC_QR_DCY) is used instead. The DRC Quick-Release control bits are described in Table 22. REGISTER ADDRESS R29 (1Dh) BIT 2 LABEL DRC_QR DEFAULT 1 DRC Control 1 DESCRIPTION DRC Quick-release Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R34 (22h) 3:2 DRC Control 6 DRC_QR_THR [1:0] 00 DRC Quick-release threshold (crest factor in dB) 00 = 12dB 01 = 18dB 10 = 24dB 11 = 30dB 1:0 DRC_QR_DCY [1:0] 00 DRC Quick-release decay rate (seconds/6dB) 00 = 0.725ms 01 = 1.45ms 10 = 5.8ms 11 = reserved Table 22 DRC Quick-Release Control The Anti-Clip and Quick Release features should not be used at the same time. DRC INITIAL VALUE The DRC can be set up to a defined initial condition based on the expected signal level when the DRC is enabled. This can be set using the DRC_INIT bits in register R35 (23h) bits 4 to 0. Note: This does NOT set the initial gain of the DRC. It sets the expected signal level of the DRC input signal when the DRC is enabled. REGISTER ADDRESS R35 (23h) DRC Control 7 BIT 4:0 LABEL DRC_INIT DEFAULT 00000 DESCRIPTION Initial value at DRC startup 00000 = 0dB 00001 = -3.75dB … (-3.75dB steps) 11111 = -116.25dB w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 44 WM8945 Production Data DIGITAL-TO-ANALOGUE CONVERTER (DAC) The WM8945 DAC receives digital input data from the digital audio interface. (Note that, depending on the DSP Configuration mode, the digital input may first be processed and filtered in the DSP Core.) The digital audio data is converted to an oversampled bit-stream in the on-chip, true 24-bit digital interpolation filter. The bit-stream data enters the multi-bit, sigma-delta DAC, which converts them to high quality analogue audio. The analogue output from the DAC can then be mixed with other analogue inputs before being sent to the analogue output pins (see “Output Signal Path”). The DAC is enabled by the DACL_ENA register bit. REGISTER ADDRESS R3 (03h) BIT 1 LABEL DACR_ENA DEFAULT 0 Power Management 2 DESCRIPTION Right DAC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled DACR_ENA must be set to 1 when processing right channel data from the DAC or Digital Beep Generator. 0 DACL_ENA 0 Left DAC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled DACR_ENA must be set to 1 when processing left channel data from the DAC or Digital Beep Generator. Table 23 DAC Enable Control Note: The WM8945 will only function correctly in playback mode when the left and right DACs are both enabled. DAC DIGITAL VOLUME CONTROL The output of the DACs can be digitally amplified or attenuated over a range from -71.625dB to +23.625dB in 0.375dB steps. The volume of each channel can be controlled separately using DACL_VOL. The DAC Volume is part of the DAC Digital Filters block. The gain for a given eight-bit code X is given by: 0.375 (X-192) dB for 1 X 255; MUTE for X = 0 The DAC_VU bit controls the loading of digital volume control data. The DACL_VOL control data is only loaded into the respective control register when DAC_VU = 1. The output of the DAC can be digitally muted using the DACL_MUTE or DAC_MUTEALL bits. A digital soft-mute feature is provided in order to avoid sudden glitches in the analogue signal. When DAC_VOL_RAMP is enabled, then all mute, un-mute or volume change commands are implemented as a gradual volume change in the digital domain. The rate at which the volume ramps up is half of the sample freq (fs/2). The DAC_VOL_RAMP register field is described in Table 24. REGISTER ADDRESS R21 (15h) BIT 8 LABEL DAC_MUTEALL DEFAULT 1 DAC Digital Mute for All Channels: 1 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute on all channels DAC Volume Ramp control 0 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled DAC Volume Update DAC Control 1 R22 (16h) 4 DAC_VOL_RAMP DAC Control 2 R23 (17h) 12 DAC_VU DESCRIPTION Left DAC Digital Vol Writing a 1 to this bit enables the Left DAC volume to be updated 8 DACL_MUTE 0 Left DAC Digital Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 45 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT 7:0 LABEL DACL_VOL [7:0] DEFAULT 1100_0000 (0dB) DESCRIPTION Left DAC Digital Volume 0000_0000 = mute 0000_0001 = -71.625dB 0000_0010 = -71.250dB … 1100_0000 = 0dB ... 1111_1111 = +23.625dB (See Table 25 for volume range) Table 24 DAC Digital Volume Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 46 WM8945 Production Data DACL_VOL Volume (dB) DACL_VOL Volume (dB) DACL_VOL Volume (dB) DACL_VOL Volume (dB) 0h 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 6h 7h 8h 9h Ah Bh Ch Dh Eh Fh 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 1Ah 1Bh 1Ch 1Dh 1Eh 1Fh 20h 21h 22h 23h 24h 25h 26h 27h 28h 29h 2Ah 2Bh 2Ch 2Dh 2Eh 2Fh 30h 31h 32h 33h 34h 35h 36h 37h 38h 39h 3Ah 3Bh 3Ch 3Dh 3Eh 3Fh MUTE -71.625 -71.250 -70.875 -70.500 -70.125 -69.750 -69.375 -69.000 -68.625 -68.250 -67.875 -67.500 -67.125 -66.750 -66.375 -66.000 -65.625 -65.250 -64.875 -64.500 -64.125 -63.750 -63.375 -63.000 -62.625 -62.250 -61.875 -61.500 -61.125 -60.750 -60.375 -60.000 -59.625 -59.250 -58.875 -58.500 -58.125 -57.750 -57.375 -57.000 -56.625 -56.250 -55.875 -55.500 -55.125 -54.750 -54.375 -54.000 -53.625 -53.250 -52.875 -52.500 -52.125 -51.750 -51.375 -51.000 -50.625 -50.250 -49.875 -49.500 -49.125 -48.750 -48.375 40h 41h 42h 43h 44h 45h 46h 47h 48h 49h 4Ah 4Bh 4Ch 4Dh 4Eh 4Fh 50h 51h 52h 53h 54h 55h 56h 57h 58h 59h 5Ah 5Bh 5Ch 5Dh 5Eh 5Fh 60h 61h 62h 63h 64h 65h 66h 67h 68h 69h 6Ah 6Bh 6Ch 6Dh 6Eh 6Fh 70h 71h 72h 73h 74h 75h 76h 77h 78h 79h 7Ah 7Bh 7Ch 7Dh 7Eh 7Fh -48.000 -47.625 -47.250 -46.875 -46.500 -46.125 -45.750 -45.375 -45.000 -44.625 -44.250 -43.875 -43.500 -43.125 -42.750 -42.375 -42.000 -41.625 -41.250 -40.875 -40.500 -40.125 -39.750 -39.375 -39.000 -38.625 -38.250 -37.875 -37.500 -37.125 -36.750 -36.375 -36.000 -35.625 -35.250 -34.875 -34.500 -34.125 -33.750 -33.375 -33.000 -32.625 -32.250 -31.875 -31.500 -31.125 -30.750 -30.375 -30.000 -29.625 -29.250 -28.875 -28.500 -28.125 -27.750 -27.375 -27.000 -26.625 -26.250 -25.875 -25.500 -25.125 -24.750 -24.375 80h 81h 82h 83h 84h 85h 86h 87h 88h 89h 8Ah 8Bh 8Ch 8Dh 8Eh 8Fh 90h 91h 92h 93h 94h 95h 96h 97h 98h 99h 9Ah 9Bh 9Ch 9Dh 9Eh 9Fh A0h A1h A2h A3h A4h A5h A6h A7h A8h A9h AAh ABh ACh ADh AEh AFh B0h B1h B2h B3h B4h B5h B6h B7h B8h B9h BAh BBh BCh BDh BEh BFh -24.000 -23.625 -23.250 -22.875 -22.500 -22.125 -21.750 -21.375 -21.000 -20.625 -20.250 -19.875 -19.500 -19.125 -18.750 -18.375 -18.000 -17.625 -17.250 -16.875 -16.500 -16.125 -15.750 -15.375 -15.000 -14.625 -14.250 -13.875 -13.500 -13.125 -12.750 -12.375 -12.000 -11.625 -11.250 -10.875 -10.500 -10.125 -9.750 -9.375 -9.000 -8.625 -8.250 -7.875 -7.500 -7.125 -6.750 -6.375 -6.000 -5.625 -5.250 -4.875 -4.500 -4.125 -3.750 -3.375 -3.000 -2.625 -2.250 -1.875 -1.500 -1.125 -0.750 -0.375 C0h C1h C2h C3h C4h C5h C6h C7h C8h C9h CAh CBh CCh CDh CEh CFh D0h D1h D2h D3h D4h D5h D6h D7h D8h D9h DAh DBh DCh DDh DEh DFh E0h E1h E2h E3h E4h E5h E6h E7h E8h E9h EAh EBh ECh EDh EEh EFh F0h F1h F2h F3h F4h F5h F6h F7h F8h F9h FAh FBh FCh FDh FEh FFh 0.000 0.375 0.750 1.125 1.500 1.875 2.250 2.625 3.000 3.375 3.750 4.125 4.500 4.875 5.250 5.625 6.000 6.375 6.750 7.125 7.500 7.875 8.250 8.625 9.000 9.375 9.750 10.125 10.500 10.875 11.250 11.625 12.000 12.375 12.750 13.125 13.500 13.875 14.250 14.625 15.000 15.375 15.750 16.125 16.500 16.875 17.250 17.625 18.000 18.375 18.750 19.125 19.500 19.875 20.250 20.625 21.000 21.375 21.750 22.125 22.500 22.875 23.250 23.625 Table 25 DAC Digital Volume Range w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 47 WM8945 Production Data DAC AUTO-MUTE The DAC digital mute and volume controls are described earlier in Table 24. The DAC also incorporates an analogue auto-mute, which is enabled by setting DAC_AUTOMUTE. When the auto-mute is enabled, and a series of 1024 consecutive zero-samples is detected, the DAC output is muted in order to attenuate noise that might be present in output signal path. The DAC resumes normal operation as soon as digital audio data is detected. REGISTER ADDRESS R21 (15h) BIT LABEL DEFAULT 4 DAC_AUTOMUTE 1 DAC Control 1 DESCRIPTION DAC Auto-Mute Control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Table 26 DAC Auto Mute Note: The DAC_AUTOMUTE bit should not be set when the BEEP generator is used. DAC SLOPING STOPBAND FILTER Two DAC filter types are available, selected by the register bit DAC_SB_FLT. When operating at lower sample rates (e.g. during voice communication) it is recommended that the sloping stopband filter type is selected (DAC_SB_FLT=1) to reduce out-of-band noise which can be audible at low DAC sample rates. See “Digital Filter Characteristics” for details of DAC filter characteristics. REGISTER ADDRESS R22 (16h) BIT 0 LABEL DAC_SB_FLT DAC Control 2 DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION Selects DAC filter characteristics 0 = Normal mode 1 = Sloping stopband mode Table 27 DAC Sloping Stopband Filter w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 48 WM8945 Production Data DIGITAL BEEP GENERATOR The WM8945 provides a digital signal generator which can be used to inject an audio tone (beep) into the DAC signal path. The output of the beep generator is digitally mixed with the DAC outputs, after the DAC digital volume. The beep is enabled using BEEP_ENA. The beep function creates an approximation of a Sine wave. The audio frequency is set using BEEP_RATE. The beep volume is set using BEEP_GAIN. Note that the volume of the digital beep generator is not affected by the DAC volume or DAC mute controls. The DAC_AUTOMUTE bit should not be set when the BEEP generator is used. The digital beep generator control fields are described in Table 28. REGISTER ADDRESS R37 (25h) BIT LABEL DEFAULT 6:3 BEEP_GAIN [3:0] 0000 Beep Control 1 DESCRIPTION Digital Beep Volume Control 0000 = mute 0001 = -83dB 0010 = -77dB … (6dB steps) 1111 = +1dB 2:1 BEEP_RATE [1:0] 01 Beep Waveform Control 00 = Reserved 01 = 1kHz 10 = 2kHz 11 = 4kHz 0 BEEP_ENA 0 Digital Beep Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that the DAC and associated signal path needs to be enabled when using the digital beep. Table 28 Digital Beep Generator w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 49 WM8945 Production Data OUTPUT SIGNAL PATH The WM8945 provides a Line Output mixer and two Speaker Output mixers. Multiple inputs to each mixer provide a high degree of flexibility to route different signal paths to each of the four analogue outputs. The DAC outputs can be routed to the mixers either directly or in inverted phase. This makes it easy to generate differential (BTL) output signals. The Auxiliary inputs AUX1/2 may be routed directly to the Speaker outputs, bypassing the Speaker PGAs and mixers. This can be used to provide a fixed-gain signal path for a “PC Beep” or similar application. The output signal paths and associated control registers are illustrated in Figure 19. Note that the speaker outputs are intended to drive a mono headset or speaker (in BTL configuration). They are not designed to drive stereo speakers directly. Figure 19 Output Signal Paths w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 50 WM8945 Production Data OUTPUT SIGNAL PATHS ENABLE Each analogue output pin can be independently enabled or disabled using the register bits described in Table 29. The speaker output PGAs and mixers can also be controlled. REGISTER ADDRESS R3 (03h) Power management 2 BIT 14 LABEL OUTL_ENA DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION LINEOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 13 SPKR_PGA_ENA 0 Speaker Right PGA enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 12 SPKL_PGA_ENA 0 Speaker Left PGA enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 11 SPKR_SPKVDD_ ENA 0 SPKOUTR enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTR is also controlled by SPKR_OP_ENA. When powering down SPKOUTR, the SPKR_SPKVDD_ENA bit should be reset first. 10 SPKL_SPKVDD_ ENA 0 SPKOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTL is also controlled by SPKL_OP_ENA. When powering down SPKOUTL, the SPKL_SPKVDD_ENA bit should be reset first 7 SPKR_OP_ENA 0 SPKOUTR enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTR is also controlled by SPKR_SPKVDD_ENA. When powering up SPKOUTR, the SPKR_OP_ENA bit should be enabled first. 6 SPKL_OP_ENA 0 SPKOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTL is also controlled by SPKL_SPKVDD_ENA. When powering up SPKOUTL, the SPKL_OP_ENA bit should be enabled first 3 SPKR_MIX_ENA 0 Right speaker output mixer enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 SPKL_MIX_ENA 0 Left speaker output mixer enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Table 29 Output Signal Paths Enable w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 51 WM8945 Production Data To enable the output PGAs and mixers, the reference voltage VMID and the bias current must also be enabled. See “Reference Voltages and Master Bias” for details of the associated controls VMID_SEL and BIAS_ENA. Note that the Line output, Speaker outputs and Speaker PGA mixers are all muted by default. The required signal paths must be un-muted using the control bits described in the respective tables below. LINE OUTPUT MIXER CONTROL The Line Output mixer controls are described in Table 30. These allow any of the DAC, Inverted DAC, AUX1/2 and one of the ADC Bypass signals to be mixed. The output of the mixer can be muted using the LINEL_MUTE bit. Care should be taken when mixing more than one path to the Line Output mixer in order to avoid clipping. The gain of each input path is adjustable using a selectable -6dB control in each path to facilitate this. Note that the attenuation control field DACL_TO_OUTL_ATTEN controls the DAC and the Inverted DAC mixer paths to the Line Output mixer. Note that the DAC input level may also be controlled by the DAC digital volume control – see “Digital to Analogue Converter (DAC)” for further details. When the AUX1 or AUX2 pin is used as an audio input, that pin must be configured for audio using the AUX1_AUDIO or AUX2_AUDIO register bits. These bits are defined in Table 2 (see “Analogue Input Signal Path”). REGISTER ADDRESS R42 (2Ah) BIT 8 LABEL LINEL_MUTE DEFAULT 1 Output ctrl DESCRIPTION LINEOUTL Output Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute R49 (31h) 6 BYPL_TO_OUTL 0 Line L mixer control 1 Left Input PGA (ADC bypass) to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 5 MDACL_TO_ 0 OUTL Inverted Left DAC to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3 DACL_TO_OUTL 0 Left DAC to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 AUX2_TO_OUTL 0 AUX2 Audio Input to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 AUX1_TO_OUTL 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R51 (33h) 6 Line L mixer control 2 BYPL_TO_OUTL _ATTEN 0 Left Input PGA (ADC bypass) to Left Output Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 3 DACL_TO_OUTL _ATTEN 0 Left DAC to Left Output Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 52 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT LABEL DEFAULT 1 AUX2_TO_OUTL _ATTEN 0 DESCRIPTION AUX2 Audio Input to Left Output Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 0 AUX1_TO_OUTL _ATTEN 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Output Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation Table 30 Line Output Mixer (MIXOUTL) Control SPEAKER PGA MIXER CONTROL The Speaker PGA mixer controls are described in Table 31 for the left channel (MIXSPKL) and Table 32 for the right channel (MIXSPKR). These allow any of the DAC, Inverted DAC, AUX1/2 and one of the ADC Bypass signals to be mixed. The output of each PGA mixer can be muted also, using the SPKL_MIX_MUTE and SPKR_MIX_MUTE bits. Note that the output from the Speaker PGA mixer is also controlled by the Speaker PGA Volume control and the Speaker Output control described in the following sections. Care should be taken when enabling more than one path to the Speaker PGA mixers in order to avoid clipping. The gain of each input path is adjustable using a selectable -6dB control in each path to facilitate this. Note that the attenuation control field DACL_TO_PGAL_ATTEN controls the DAC and the Inverted DAC mixer paths to the Left Speaker PGA mixer. Similarly, the DACL_TO_PGAR_ATTEN controls the DAC and the Inverted DAC mixer paths to the Right Speaker PGA mixer. Note that the DAC input level may also be controlled by the DAC digital volume control – see “Digital to Analogue Converter (DAC)” for further details. When the AUX1 or AUX2 pin is used as an audio input, that pin must be configured for audio using the AUX1_AUDIO or AUX2_AUDIO register bits. These bits are defined in Table 2 (see “Analogue Input Signal Path”). REGISTER ADDRESS R3 (03h) BIT 4 Power Management 1 R43 (2Bh) LABEL SPKL_MIX_ DEFAULT 1 MUTE DESCRIPTION Left Speaker PGA Mixer Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 6 BYPL_TO_PGAL 0 SPK mixer control 1 Left Input PGA (ADC bypass) to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 5 MDACL_TO_ 0 PGAL Inverted Left DAC to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3 DACL_TO_PGAL 0 Left DAC to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 AUX2_TO_PGAL 0 AUX2 Audio Input to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 53 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT LABEL DEFAULT 0 AUX1_TO_PGAL 0 DESCRIPTION AUX1 Audio Input to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R45 (2Dh) 6 SPK mixer control 3 BYPL_TO_PGAL _ATTEN 0 Left Input PGA (ADC bypass) to Left Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 3 DACL_TO_PGAL _ATTEN 0 Left DAC to Left Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 1 AUX2_TO_PGAL _ATTEN 0 AUX2 Audio Input to Left Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 0 AUX1_TO_PGAL _ATTEN 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation Table 31 Left Speaker PGA Mixer (MIXSPKL) Control REGISTER ADDRESS R3 (03h) BIT 5 SPKR_MIX_ DEFAULT 1 MUTE Power Management 1 R44 (2Ch) LABEL DESCRIPTION Right Speaker PGA Mixer Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 5 SPK mixer control 2 MDACL_TO_ 0 PGAR Inverted Left DAC to Right Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3 DACL_TO_PGAR 0 Left DAC to Right Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 AUX2_TO_PGAR 0 AUX2 Audio Input to Right Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 AUX1_TO_PGAR 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Right Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R46 (2Eh) 3 SPK mixer control 4 DACL_TO_PGAR _ATTEN 0 Left DAC to Right Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 1 AUX2_TO_PGAR _ATTEN 0 AUX2 Audio Input to Right Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 54 WM8945 Production Data 0 AUX1_TO_PGAR _ATTEN 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Right Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation Table 32 Right Speaker PGA Mixer (MIXSPKR) Control SPEAKER PGA VOLUME CONTROL The volume control of the left and right Speaker PGAs can be independently adjusted using the SPKL_VOL and SPKR_VOL register fields as described in Table 33. The gain range is -57dB to +6dB in 1dB steps. Note that the output from the Speaker PGA Volume control is an input to the Speaker Output control described in the following section. To prevent “zipper noise”, a zero-cross function is provided on the Speaker PGAs. When this feature is enabled, volume updates will not take place until a zero-crossing is detected. In the case of a long period without zero-crossings, a timeout function is provided. When the zero-cross function is enabled, the volume will update after the timeout period if no earlier zero-cross has occurred. The timeout clock is enabled using TOCLK_ENA. See “Clocking and Sample Rates” for the definition of this bit. The SPK_VU bits control the loading of the Speaker PGA volume data. When SPK_VU is set to 0, the volume control data will be loaded into the respective control register, but will not actually change the gain setting. The left and right Speaker PGA volume settings are both updated when a 1 is written to either SPK_VU bit. This makes it possible to update the gain of the left and right output paths simultaneously. The Speaker PGA volume control register fields are described in Table 33. REGISTER ADDRESS R47 (2Fh) BIT 8 LABEL SPK_VU DEFAULT 0 Left SPK volume ctrl DESCRIPTION Speaker PGA Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit will cause the Left and Right Speaker PGA volumes to be updated simultaneously. 7 SPKL_ZC 0 Left Speaker PGA Zero Cross Detector 0 = Change gain immediately 1 = Change gain on zero cross only 6 SPKL_PGA_ 1 MUTE Left Speaker PGA Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 5:0 SPKL_VOL 11_1001 (0dB) Left Speaker PGA Volume 00_0000 = -57dB gain 00_0001 = -56dB … 11_1001 = 0dB ... 11_1111 = +6dB (See Table 34 for volume range) R48 (30h) 8 SPK_VU 0 Right SPK volume ctrl Speaker PGA Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit will cause the Left and Right Speaker PGA volumes to be updated simultaneously. 7 SPKR_ZC 0 Right Speaker PGA Zero Cross Detector 0 = Change gain immediately 1 = Change gain on zero cross only w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 55 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT 6 LABEL SPKR_PGA_ DEFAULT 1 MUTE DESCRIPTION Right Speaker PGA Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 5:0 SPKR_VOL 11_1001 (0dB) Right Speaker PGA Volume 00_0000 = -57dB gain 00_0001 = -56dB … 11_1001 = 0dB ... 11_1111 = +6dB (See Table 34 for volume range) Table 33 Speaker PGA Volume Control PGA GAIN SETTING VOLUME (dB) PGA GAIN SETTING VOLUME (dB) 00h -57 20h -25 01h -56 21h -24 02h -55 22h -23 03h -54 23h -22 04h -53 24h -21 05h -52 25h -20 06h -51 26h -19 07h -50 27h -18 08h -49 28h -17 09h -48 29h -16 0Ah -47 2Ah -15 0Bh -46 2Bh -14 0Ch -45 2Ch -13 0Dh -44 2Dh -12 0Eh -43 2Eh -11 0Fh -42 2Fh -10 10h -41 30h -9 11h -40 31h -8 12h -39 32h -7 13h -38 33h -6 14h -37 34h -5 15h -36 35h -4 16h -35 36h -3 17h -34 37h -2 18h -33 38h -1 19h -32 39h 0 1Ah -31 3Ah +1 1Bh -30 3Bh +2 1Ch -29 3Ch +3 1Dh -28 3Dh +4 1Eh -27 3Eh +5 1Fh -26 3Fh +6 Table 34 Speaker PGA Volume Range w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 56 WM8945 Production Data SPEAKER OUTPUT CONTROL Each Speaker output has its own output mixer. This allows the output of the respective Speaker PGA to be enabled or disabled, and also allows the Auxiliary input AUX1 to be routed directly to either Speaker output. The two Speaker outputs can be muted also, using the SPKR_OP_MUTE and SPKL_OP_MUTE. The AUX1 path can be used to provide a fixed-gain signal path that is unaffected by the Speaker PGA setting. This feature is intended for a “PC Beep” or similar applications. Care should be taken when enabling more than one path to the Speaker Output mixers in order to avoid clipping. The gain of each input path is adjustable using a selectable -6dB control in each path to facilitate this. When the AUX1 pin is used as an audio input, that pin must be configured for audio using the AUX1_AUDIO register bit. This bit is defined in Table 2 (see “Analogue Input Signal Path”). The Speaker Output control registers are described in Table 35. REGISTER ADDRESS R3 (03h) Power Management 1 BIT LABEL DEFAULT 9 SPKR_OP_MUTE 1 DESCRIPTION SPKOUTR Output Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 8 SPKL_OP_MUTE 1 SPKOUTL Output Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute R43 (2Bh) 8 AUX1_TO_SPKL 0 SPK mixer control 1 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Speaker Output select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7 PGAL_TO_SPKL 0 Left Speaker PGA Mixer to Left Speaker Output select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R44 (2Ch) 8 AUX1_TO_SPKR 0 SPK mixer control 2 AUX1 Audio Input to Right Speaker Output select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7 PGAR_TO_SPKR 0 Right Speaker PGA Mixer to Right Speaker Output select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R45 (2Dh) 8 SPK mixer control 3 AUX1_TO_SPKL_ ATTEN 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Speaker Output attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 7 PGAL_TO_SPKL _ATTEN 0 Left Speaker PGA Mixer to Left Speaker Output attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation R46 (2Eh) 8 SPK mixer control 4 AUX1_TO_SPKR _ATTEN 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Right Speaker Output attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 7 PGAR_TO_SPKR _ATTEN 0 Right Speaker PGA Mixer to Right Speaker Output attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation Table 35 Speaker Output Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 57 WM8945 Production Data ANALOGUE OUTPUTS The speaker outputs are highly configurable and may be used in many different ways. The output mixers can be configured to generate mono or stereo, single-ended or differential outputs. The Class AB Speaker output driver can deliver up to 400mW into an 8 speaker in BTL mode. Alternatively, the Speaker outputs can deliver 40mW to a stereo 16 headphone load. LINE OUTPUT The line output LINEOUTL is the external connection to the MIXOUTL mixer. This is a single-ended output driver. Note that single-ended line output can also be provided on SPKOUTL and SPKOUTR. SPEAKER OUTPUTS The speaker outputs SPKOUTL and SPKOUTR are the external connections to the Speaker Output mixers. These outputs are intended for a mono speaker or headphone in BTL configuration or for a twin mono line load. In a typical application, a BTL output from the DAC may be generated at the speaker outputs by routing the inverted DAC signal to one output and the non-inverted DAC signal to the other. The auxiliary inputs AUX1 or AUX2 may be routed to the mono speaker by enabling the respective signal path in either the Left or Right speaker output mixer. (Note that these signals should not be enabled in both mixers at once; this will lead to cancellation at the BTL output.) EXTERNAL COMPONENTS FOR LINE OUTPUT In single-ended output configurations, DC blocking capacitors are required at the output pins (LINEOUTL, SPKOUTL and SPKOUTR). See “Applications Information” for details of these components. Note that these components are not required for differential (BTL) output modes. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 58 WM8945 Production Data LDO REGULATOR The WM8945 provides an internal LDO which provides a regulated voltage for use as in internal supply and reference, which can also be used to power external circuits. The LDO is enabled by setting the LDO_ENA register bit. The LDO supply is drawn from the LDOVDD pin; the LDO output is provided on the LDOVOUT pin. The LDO requires a reference voltage and a bias source; these are configured as described below. The LDO bias source is selected using LDO_BIAS_SRC. Care is required during start-up to ensure that the selected bias is enabled; the master bias will not normally be available at initial start-up, and the fast bias should be selected in the first instance. The LDO reference voltage can be selected using LDO_REF_SEL; this allows selection of either the internal bandgap reference or one of the VMID resistor strings. When VMID is selected as the reference, then LDO_REF_SEL_FAST selects either the Normal VMID reference or the Fast-Start VMID reference. Care is required during start-up to ensure that the selected reference is enabled; the VMID references are enabled using VMID_ENA and VMID_FAST_START as described in Table 39 and Table 40 respectively. The internal bandgap reference is nominally 1.5V. Note that this value is not trimmed and may vary significantly (+/-10%) between different devices. When using this reference, the internal bandgap reference must be enabled by setting the BG_ENA register, as described in Table 36. The bandgap voltage can be adjusted using the BG_VSEL register as described in Table 38. The LDO output voltage is set using the LDO_VSEL register, which sets the ratio of the output voltage to the LDO reference voltage. See Table 37 for LDO output voltages. Example1: How to generate an LDOVOUT voltage of 3.0V from a 3.3V LDOVDD supply voltage. LDO_REF_SEL = 0 (VMID as the reference voltage) VMID = 1.5V (VMID_REF_SEL = 0, VMID_CTRL = 0) LDOVOUT = Vref * 1.97 = 1.5V * 1.97 = 2.96V (see Table 37) Example2: Generating an LDOVOUT voltage of 2.4V from a 3.0V LDOVDD supply. For maximum signal swing the VMID voltage should be half of the LDOVOUT voltage. For LDOVOUT of 2.4V the optimum VMID voltage is 1.2V. Select the VMID source voltage as LDOVOUT (VMID_REF_SEL = 1) and the VMID ratio as 1/2 (VMID_CTRL = 1). This gives VMID = 1.2V. VMID cannot be used as the LDO reference voltage so use the Bandgap voltage as the LDO reference voltage (LDO_REF_SEL = 1, BG_ENA = 1). The default Bandgap voltage is 1.467V. For LDOVOUT of 2.4V LDOVSEL should be set to 2.4V / 1.467V = 1.636. Referring to Table 37 LDO_VSEL = 03h will give LDOVOUT = 1.467 * 1.66 = 2.435V. Note that the Bandgap voltage is not trimmed so if required the Bandgap voltage can be changed (BG_VSEL – see Table 38) to get closer to the required voltage. By default, the LDO output is actively discharged to GND through internal resistors when the LDO is disabled. This is desirable in shut-down to prevent any external connections being affected by the internal circuits. The LDO output can be set to float when the LDO is disabled; this is selected by setting the LDO_OP_FLT bit. This option should be selected if the LDO is bypassed and an external voltage is applied to LDOVOUT. The LDO output is monitored for voltage accuracy. The LDO undervoltage status can be read at any time from the LDO_UV_STS bit, as described in Table 36. This bit can be polled at any time, or may output directly on a GPIO pin, or may be used to generate Interrupt events. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 59 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R17 (11h) BIT 0 LABEL LDO_UV_STS DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION LDO Undervoltage status 0 = Normal Status Flags 1 = Undervoltage R53 (35h) 15 LDO_ENA 0 LDO LDO Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 14 LDO_REF_SEL_F AST 0 LDO Voltage reference select 0 = VMID (normal) 1 = VMID (fast start) This field is only effective when LDO_REF_SEL = 0 13 LDO_REF_SEL 0 LDO Voltage reference select 0 = VMID 1 = Bandgap 12 LDO_OPFLT 0 LDO Output float 0 = Disabled (Output discharged when disabled) 1 = Enabled (Output floats when disabled) 5 LDO_BIAS_SRC 0 LDO Bias Source select 0 = Master Bias 1 = Start-Up Bias 4:0 LDO_VSEL 00111 LDO Voltage select (Sets the LDO output as a ratio of the selected voltage reference. The voltage reference is set by LDO_REF_SEL.) 00111 = Vref x 1.97 (default) (See Table 37 for range) R54 (36h) 15 BG_ENA 0 Bandgap Bandgap Reference Control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 4:0 BG_VSEL[4:0] 01010 Bandgap Voltage select (Sets the Bandgap voltage) 00000 = 1.200V … 26.7mV steps 01010 = 1.467V (default) … 01111 = 1.600V 10000 to 11111 = reserved (See Table 38 for values) Table 36 LDO Regulator Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 60 WM8945 Production Data LDO_VSEL [4:0] LDO OUTPUT LDO_VSEL [4:0] LDO OUTPUT 00h Vref x 1.42 10h Vref x 2.85 01h Vref x 1.50 11h Vref x 3.00 02h Vref x 1.58 12h Vref x 3.16 03h Vref x 1.66 13h Vref x 3.32 04h Vref x 1.74 14h Vref x 3.49 05h Vref x 1.82 15h Vref x 3.63 06h Vref x 1.90 16h Vref x 3.79 07h Vref x 1.97 17h Vref x 3.95 08h Vref x 2.06 18h Vref x 4.12 09h Vref x 2.13 19h Vref x 4.28 0Ah Vref x 2.21 1Ah Vref x 4.42 0Bh Vref x 2.29 1Bh Vref x 4.58 0Ch Vref x 2.37 1Ch Vref x 4.75 0Dh Vref x 2.45 1Dh Vref x 4.90 0Eh Vref x 2.53 1Eh Vref x 5.06 0Fh Vref x 2.69 1Fh Vref x 5.23 Note – Vref is the applicable voltage reference, selected by LDO_REF_SEL. Table 37 LDO Output Voltage Control BG_VSEL [4:0] BG Voltage (V) BG_VSEL [4:0] BG Voltage (V) 00h 1.200 08h 1.414 01h 1.227 09h 1.440 02h 1.253 0Ah 1.467 03h 1.280 0Bh 1.494 04h 1.307 0Ch 1.520 05h 1.334 0Dh 1.547 06h 1.360 0Eh 1.574 07h 1.387 0Fh 1.600 Table 38 Bandgap Voltage Control REFERENCE VOLTAGES AND MASTER BIAS This section describes the analogue reference voltage and bias current controls. It also describes the VMID soft-start circuit for pop suppressed start-up and shut-down. The analogue circuits in the WM8945 require a mid-rail analogue reference voltage, VMID. This reference is generated via a programmable resistor chain. Together with the external decoupling capacitor (connected to the VMIDC pin), the programmable resistor chain results in a slow, normal or fast charging characteristic on the VMID reference. This is enabled using VMID_ENA and VMID_SEL. The different resistor options controlled by VMID_SEL can be used to optimise the reference for normal operation, low power standby or for fast start-up as described in Table 39. The VMID resistor chain can be powered from the LDO output (LDOVOUT) or from the LDO supply (LDOVDD). This is selected using VMID_REF_SEL. Note that when VMID is selected as the LDO reference voltage, VMID cannot be generated from the LDOVOUT supply voltage (VMID_REF_SEL = 1) and must be generated from the LDOVDD supply voltage (VMID_REF_SEL = 0). The VMID ratio can be selected using VMID_CTRL. This selects the ratio of VMID to the supply voltage that has been selected by VMID_REF_SEL. VMID should be half of the LDOVOUT supply voltage for maximum voltage swing. In the case where VMID_REF_SEL has selected the LDOVOUT supply voltage output, then VMID_CTRL should select the ratio “1/2”. In the case where VMID_REF_SEL has selected the LDOVDD supply voltage, then the alternate ratio “5/11” may be preferred provided LDOVDDD = 3.3V and LDOVOUT = 3.0V. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 61 WM8945 Production Data Note that the “5/11” ratio is designed for the case where LDOVDD = 3.3V and LDOVOUT = 3.0V. This results in a VMID = 3.3V x (5/11) = 1.5V which is half of the LDOVOUT voltage. If these conditions are not being used or the LDO has been bypassed then VMID_REF should be set to select LDOVOUT as the VMID source and VMID_CTRL should be set to select the ratio “1/2”. The analogue circuits in the WM8945 require a bias current. The normal bias current is enabled by setting BIAS_ENA. Note that the normal bias current source requires VMID to be enabled also. The Master Reference and Bias Control bits are defined in Table 39. REGISTER ADDRESS R7 (07h) BIT 10 LABEL VMID_REF_SEL DEFAULT 0 Additional control DESCRIPTION VMID Source Select 0 = LDO supply (LDOVDD) 1 = LDO output (LDOVOUT) 9 VMID_CTRL 0 VMID Ratio control Sets the ratio of VMID to the source selected by VMID_REF_SEL 0 = 5/11 1=½ 4 VMID_ENA 0 VMID Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R2 (02h) Power Management 1 3 BIAS_ENA 0 Master Bias Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1:0 VMID_SEL [1:0] 00 VMID Divider Enable and Select 00 = VMID disabled (for OFF mode) 01 = 2 x 50k divider (for normal operation) 10 = 2 x 250k divider (for low power standby) 11 = 2 x 5k divider (for fast startup) Table 39 Reference Voltages and Master Bias Enable A pop-suppressed start-up requires VMID to be enabled smoothly, without the step change normally associated with the initial stage of the VMID capacitor charging. A pop-suppressed start-up also requires the analogue bias current to be enabled throughout the signal path prior to the VMID reference voltage being applied. The WM8945 incorporates pop-suppression circuits which address these requirements. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 62 WM8945 Production Data An alternate bias current source (Start-Up Bias) is provided for pop-free start-up; this is enabled by the STARTUP_BIAS_ENA register bit. The start-up bias is selected (in place of the normal bias) using the BIAS_SRC bit. It is recommended that the start-up bias is used during start-up, before switching back to the higher quality, normal bias. A soft-start circuit is provided in order to control the switch-on of the VMID reference. The soft-start control circuit offers two slew rates for enabling the VMID reference; these are selected and enabled by VMID_RAMP. When the soft-start circuit is enabled prior to enabling VMID_SEL, the reference voltage rises smoothly, without the step change that would otherwise occur. It is recommended that the soft-start circuit and the output signal path be enabled before VMID is enabled by VMID_SEL. A soft shut-down is provided, using the soft-start control circuit and the start-up bias current generator. The soft shut-down of VMID is achieved by setting VMID_RAMP, STARTUP_BIAS_ENA and BIAS_SRC to select the start-up bias current and soft-start circuit prior to setting VMID_SEL=00. The internal LDO (described in the previous section) requires a voltage reference. Under normal operating conditions, this is provided from VMID, via the register controls described in Table 39. Note, however, that VMID is normally generated from the LDO output. Therefore, an alternative voltage reference is required for start-up, which is not dependent on the LDO output. The VMID_FAST_START bit enables a ‘Fast-Start’ reference powered from LDOVDD. This alternate VMID can be selected as the LDO reference using the LDO_REF_SEL_FAST bit as described in Table 36. The VMID soft-start and fast start register controls are defined in Table 40. REGISTER ADDRESS R7 (07h) BIT 11 Additional control LABEL VMID_FAST_ DEFAULT 0 START DESCRIPTION VMID (fast-start) Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 8 STARTUP_BIAS_ ENA 0 BIAS_SRC 0 Start-Up Bias Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7 Bias Source select 0 = Normal bias 1 = Start-Up bias 6:5 VMID_RAMP [1:0] 00 VMID soft start enable / slew rate control 00 = Disabled 01 = Fast soft start 10 = Normal soft start 11 = Slow soft start Table 40 Soft Start Control POP SUPPRESSION CONTROL The WM8945 incorporates a number of features which are designed to suppress pops normally associated with Start-Up, Shut-Down or signal path control. These include the option to maintain an analogue output to VMID even when the output driver is disabled. In addition, there is the ability to actively discharge an output to GND. Note that, to achieve maximum benefit from these features, careful attention may be required to the sequence and timing of these controls. DISABLED OUTPUT CONTROL The line outputs and speaker outputs are biased to VMID in normal operation. In order to avoid audible pops caused by a disabled signal path dropping to GND, the WM8945 can maintain these connections at VMID when the relevant output stage is disabled. This is achieved by connecting a buffered VMID reference to the output. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 63 WM8945 Production Data The buffered VMID reference is enabled by setting VMID_BUF_ENA. This is applied to any disabled outputs, provided that the respective _VMID_OP_ENA bit is also set. The output resistance can be either 1k or 20k, depending on the respective _VROI register bit. The disabled output control bits are described in Table 41. See “Output Signal Path” for details of how to disable any of the audio outputs. REGISTER ADDRESS R2 (02h) BIT LABEL DEFAULT 2 VMID_BUF_ENA 0 Power management 1 DESCRIPTION VMID Buffer Enable. (The buffered VMID may be applied to disabled input and output pins.) 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R42 (2Ah) 13 Output ctrl SPKR_VMID_OP _ENA 0 Buffered VMID to SPKOUTR Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 12 SPKL_VMID_OP 0 _ENA Buffered VMID to SPKOUTL Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 10 LINEL_VMID_OP _ENA 0 Buffered VMID to LINEOUTL Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 SPK_VROI 0 Buffered VREF to SPKOUTL / SPKOUTR resistance (Disabled outputs) 0 = approx 20k 1 = approx 1k 0 LINE_VROI 0 Buffered VREF to LINEOUTL resistance (Disabled output) 0 = approx 20k 1 = approx 1k Table 41 Disabled Output Control OUTPUT DISCHARGE CONTROL The line outputs and speaker outputs can be actively discharged to GND through internal resistors if desired. This is desirable at start-up in order to achieve a known output stage condition prior to enabling the soft-start VMID reference voltage. This is also desirable in shut-down to prevent the external connections from being affected by the internal circuits. The individual control bits for discharging each audio output are described in Table 42. REGISTER ADDRESS R42 (2Ah) BIT 7 LABEL SPKR_DISCH DEFAULT 0 Output ctrl DESCRIPTION Discharges SPKOUTR output via approx 4k resistor 0 = Not active 1 = Actively discharging SPKOUTR 6 SPKL_DISCH 0 Discharges SPKOUTL output via approx 4k resistor 0 = Not active 1 = Actively discharging SPKOUTL 4 LINEL_DISCH 0 Discharges LINEOUTL output via approx 4k resistor 0 = Not active 1 = Actively discharging LINEOUTL Table 42 Output Discharge Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 64 WM8945 Production Data DIGITAL AUDIO INTERFACE The digital audio interface is used for inputting DAC data into the WM8945 and outputting ADC data from it. It uses four pins: ADCDAT: ADC data output DACDAT: DAC data input LRCLK: DAC and ADC data alignment clock BCLK: Bit clock, for synchronisation MASTER AND SLAVE MODE OPERATION The digital audio interface can be configured as a Master or a Slave interface, using the MSTR register bit. The two modes are illustrated in Figure 20 and Figure 21. BCLK LRCLK WM8945 Processor ADCDAT DACDAT Figure 20 Master Mode Figure 21 Slave Mode In Master mode, LRCLK and BCLK are configured as outputs, and the WM8945 controls the timing of the data transfer on the ADCDAT and DACDAT pins. In Master mode, the LRCLK frequency is determined automatically according to the sample rate (see “Clocking and Sample Rates”). The BCLK frequency is set by the BCLK_DIV register. BCLK_DIV must be set to an appropriate value to ensure that there are sufficient BCLK cycles to transfer the complete data words from the ADCs and to the DACs. In Slave mode, LRCLK and BCLK are configured as inputs, and the data timing is controlled by an external master. REGISTER ADDRESS R6 (06h) BIT 3:1 LABEL BCLK_DIV [2:0] DEFAULT 011 Clock Gen control DESCRIPTION BCLK Frequency (Master mode) 000 = SYSCLK 001 = SYSCLK / 2 010 = SYSCLK / 4 011 = SYSCLK / 8 100 = SYSCLK / 16 101 = SYSCLK / 32 110 = reserved 111 = reserved 0 MSTR 0 Digital Audio Interface Mode select 0 = Slave mode 1 = Master mode Table 43 Digital Audio Interface Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 65 WM8945 Production Data AUDIO DATA FORMATS Three basic audio data formats are supported: Left justified 2 IS DSP mode All four of these modes are MSB first. They are described in Audio Data Formats, below. Refer to the Electrical Characteristic section for timing information. PCM operation is supported using the DSP mode. The WM8945 is a mono device. By default, the WM8945 transmits ADCs data on the Left channel only of the Digital Audio Interface, and receives DAC data on the Left channel. The ADC transmit configuration can be set using the ADCR_SRC and ADCL_SRC bits; the DAC receive channel can be selected using the DACL_SRC bit. Digital inversion of the ADC and DAC data is also possible. The register bits controlling audio data format and channel configuration are described in Table 44. REGISTER ADDRESS R4 (04h) BIT 9 LABEL ADCR_SRC DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 1 Right Digital Audio interface source Audio Interface 0 = Left ADC data is output on right channel 1 = No data is output on right channel 8 ADCL_SRC 0 Left Digital Audio interface source 0 = Left ADC data is output on left channel 1 = No data is output on left channel 6 DACL_SRC 0 Left DAC Data Source Select 0 = Left DAC outputs left interface data 1 = Left DAC outputs right interface data 5 BCLK_INV 0 BCLK Invert 0 = BCLK not inverted 1 = BCLK inverted 4 LRCLK_INV 0 LRCLK Polarity / DSP Mode A-B select. 2 Right, left and I S modes – LRCLK polarity 0 = Not Inverted 1 = Inverted DSP Mode – Mode A-B select nd 0 = MSB is available on 2 BCLK rising edge after LRCLK rising edge (mode A) st 1 = MSB is available on 1 BCLK rising edge after LRCLK rising edge (mode B) 3:2 WL [1:0] 10 Digital Audio Interface Word Length 00 = 16 bits 01 = 20 bits 10 = 24 bits 11 = 32 bits Note – see “Companding” for the selection of 8-bit mode. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 66 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT 1:0 LABEL FMT [1:0] DEFAULT 10 DESCRIPTION Digital Audio Interface Format 00 = Reserved 01 = Left Justified 10 = I2S format 11 = DSP/PCM mode R21 (15h) 0 DACL_DATINV 0 DAC Control 1 Left DAC Invert 0 = Left DAC output not inverted 1 = Left DAC output inverted R25 (19h) 0 ADCL_DATINV ADC Control 1 0 Left ADC Invert 0 = Left ADC output not inverted 1 = Left ADC output inverted Table 44 Audio Data Format Control In Left Justified mode, the MSB is available on the first rising edge of BCLK following a LRCLK transition. The other bits up to the LSB are then transmitted in order. Depending on word length, BCLK frequency and sample rate, there may be unused BCLK cycles before each LRCLK transition. Figure 22 Left Justified Audio Interface (assuming n-bit word length) 2 In I S mode, the MSB is available on the second rising edge of BCLK following a LRCLK transition. The other bits up to the LSB are then transmitted in order. Depending on word length, BCLK frequency and sample rate, there may be unused BCLK cycles between the LSB of one sample and the MSB of the next. 2 Figure 23 I S Justified Audio Interface (assuming n-bit word length) st nd In DSP/PCM mode, the left channel MSB is available on either the 1 (mode B) or 2 (mode A) rising edge of BCLK (selected by LRCLK_INV) following a rising edge of LRCLK. Right channel data immediately follows left channel data. Depending on word length, BCLK frequency and sample rate, there may be unused BCLK cycles between the LSB of the right channel data and the next sample. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 67 WM8945 Production Data In device master mode, the LRCLK output resembles the frame pulse shown in Figure 24 and Figure 25. In device slave mode, Figure 26 and Figure 27, it is possible to use any length of frame pulse less than 1/fs, providing the falling edge of the frame pulse occurs greater than one BCLK period before the rising edge of the next frame pulse. Figure 24 DSP/PCM Mode Audio Interface (mode A, LRCLK_INV=0, Master) Figure 25 DSP/PCM Mode Audio Interface (mode B, LRCLK_INV=1, Master) Figure 26 DSP/PCM Mode Audio Interface (mode A, LRCLK_INV=0, Slave) w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 68 WM8945 Production Data Figure 27 DSP/PCM Mode Audio Interface (mode B, LRCLK_INV=0, Slave) COMPANDING The WM8945 supports A-law and -law companding on both transmit (ADC) and receive (DAC) sides as shown in Table 45. Companding converts 13 bits (-law) or 12 bits (A-law) to 8 bits using nonlinear quantization. This provides greater precision for low amplitude signals than for high amplitude signals, resulting in a greater usable dynamic range than 8 bit linear quantization. REGISTER ADDRESS R5 (05h) BIT 3 LABEL DAC_COMP DEFAULT 0 Companding control DESCRIPTION DAC Companding Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 DAC_COMP MODE 0 ADC_COMP 0 DAC Companding Mode 0 = µ-law 1 = A-law 1 ADC Companding Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 ADC_COMP MODE 0 ADC Companding Mode 0 = µ-law 1 = A-law Table 45 Companding Control Companding uses a piecewise linear approximation of the following equations (as set out by ITU-T G.711 standard) for data compression: -law (where =255 for the U.S. and Japan): F(x) = ln( 1 + |x|) / ln( 1 + ) Table 1 w } for -1 ≤ x ≤ 1 law (where A=87.6 for Europe): F(x) = A|x| / ( 1 + lnA) for x ≤ 1/A F(x) = ( 1 + lnA|x|) / (1 + lnA) for 1/A ≤ x ≤ 1 PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 69 WM8945 Production Data u-law Companding 1 120 0.9 Companded Output 0.7 80 0.6 0.5 60 0.4 40 0.3 Normalised Output 0.8 100 0.2 20 0.1 0 0 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 Normalised Input Figure 28 µ-Law Companding A-law Companding 1 120 0.9 Companded Output 0.7 80 0.6 0.5 60 0.4 40 0.3 Normalised Output 0.8 100 0.2 20 0.1 0 0 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 Normalised Input Figure 29 A-Law Companding The companded data is also inverted as recommended by the G.711 standard (all 8 bits are inverted for -law, all even data bits are inverted for A-law). Companded data is transmitted in the first 8 MSBs of its respective data word, and consists of sign (1 bit), exponent (3 bits) and mantissa (4 bits), as shown in Table 46. BIT7 BIT[6:4] BIT[3:0] SIGN EXPONENT MANTISSA Table 46 8-bit Companded Word Composition 8-bit mode is selected whenever DAC_COMP=1 or ADC_COMP=1. The use of 8-bit data allows samples to be passed using as few as 8 BCLK cycles per Left/Right Clock frame. When using DSP mode B, 8-bit data words may be transferred consecutively every 8 BCLK cycles. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 70 WM8945 Production Data 8-bit mode (without Companding) may be enabled by setting DAC_COMPMODE=1 or ADC_COMPMODE=1, when DAC_COMP=0 and ADC_COMP=0. LOOPBACK A loopback function is provided for test and evaluation purposes. When the LOOPBACK register bit is set, the DAC input data is fed through the DSP Core to the ADC output, as illustrated in Figure 30. Figure 30 Audio Interface Loopback REGISTER ADDRESS R5 (05h) BIT 5 LABEL LOOPBACK Companding control DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION Digital Loopback Function 0 = No loopback 1 = Loopback enabled (DACDAT input is fed through the DSP Core to the ADCDAT output). Table 47 Loopback Control DIGITAL PULL-UP AND PULL-DOWN The WM8945 provides integrated pull-up and pull-down resistors on each of the DACDAT, LRCLK and BCLK pins. This provides a flexible capability for interfacing with other devices. Each of the pullup and pull-down resistors can be configured independently using the register bits described in Table 48. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 71 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R4 (04h) BIT 15:14 Audio interface LABEL DACDATA_ DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 00 DACDAT pull-up / pull-down Enable PULL [1:0] 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 13:12 FRAME_PULL [1:0] 00 LRCLK pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 11:10 BCLK_PULL [1:0] 00 BCLK pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved Table 48 Pull-Up and Pull-Down Control CLOCKING AND SAMPLE RATES The internal clocks for the CODEC and Digital Audio Interface are derived from a common internal clock source, SYSCLK. This clock can either be derived directly from MCLK, or may be generated using the Frequency Locked Loop (FLL) using MCLK as a reference. All commonly-used audio sample rates can be derived directly from typical MCLK frequencies; the FLL provides additional flexibility for a wider range of MCLK frequencies. The WM8945 supports a wide range of standard audio sample rates from 8kHz to 48kHz. When the ADC and DAC are both enabled, they operate at the same sample rate, fs. Other functions such as the AUXADC, Touch Panel controller, Interrupts, GPIO input de-bounce and PGA zero-cross timeouts are clocked using a free-running oscillator. The control registers associated with Clocking and Sample Rates are described in Table 49. The overall clocking scheme for the WM8945 is illustrated in Figure 31. Figure 31 WM8945 Clocking Overview w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 72 Production Data WM8945 SYSCLK may be derived either from MCLK or from the FLL; this is selected using the SYSCLK_SRC register bit. SYSCLK is enabled using the SYSCLK_ENA and may be modified using a programmable divider configured by SYSCLK_DIV. It is important that SYSCLK_DIV is correctly set in order to produce 512 x fs at its output, where fs is the audio sampling rate. The sampling rate for the CODEC and Digital Audio Interface is configured using the SR register field. In Master mode, the frequency of the Left/Right Clock output on the LRCLK pin is the BCLK frequency divided by 64 producing 32 BCLK cycles per channel. In Master mode, the BCLK_DIV register configures the bit clock frequency output on BCLK. The WM8945 can output a configurable clock on the GPIO pins; this is enabled automatically whenever a GPIO pin is configured for CLKOUT output. The source can either be before or after the SYSCLK divider, as shown in Figure 31. The source is selected using CLKOUT_SEL, and may be modified using a programmable divider configured by CLKOUT_DIV. The WM8945 free-running oscillator required for AUXADC, Touch Panel, GPIO input de-bounced and Interrupt functions must be enabled using OSC_CLK_ENA whenever any of these functions is required. The zero-cross facility on input and output PGAs requires a timeout clock. This is enabled using the TOCLK_ENA bit. The oscillator must also be enabled using OSC_CLK_ENA. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 73 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R6 (06h) BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 OSC_CLK_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION Oscillator Enable 0 = Disabled Clock Gen control 1 = Enabled This needs to be set when doing AUXADC measurements, or when a timeout clock is required for PGA zero cross or GPIO input detection 14:13 MCLK_PULL [1:0] 00 MCLK pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 CLKOUT_SEL 0 CLKOUT Source Select 0 = SYSCLK 1 = FLL or MCLK (set by SYSCLK_SRC register) 11:10 CLKOUT_DIV [1:0] 00 CLKOUT Clock divider 00 = divide by 1 01 = divide by 2 10 = divide by 4 11 = divide by 8 9 SYSCLK_ENA 0 SYSCLK Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 8 SYSCLK_SRC 0 SYSCLK Source Select 0 = MCLK 1 = FLL output 7:5 SYSCLK_DIV [2:0] 4 TOCLK_ENA 000 0 SYSCLK Clock divider (Sets the scaling for either the MCLK or FLL clock output, depending on SYSCLK_SRC) 000 = divide by 1 001 = divide by 1.5 010 = divide by 2 011 = divide by 3 100 = divide by 4 101 = divide by 6 110 = divide by 8 111 = divide by 12 TOCLK Enabled (Enables timeout clock for GPIO level detection, AMU, and PGA zero cross timeout) 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R7 (07h) 3:0 SR [3:0] Additional control 1101 Audio Sample Rate select 0011 = 8kHz 0100 = 11.025kHz 0101 = 12kHz 0111 = 16kHz 1000 = 22.05kHz 1001 = 24kHz 1011 = 32kHz 1100 = 44.1kHz 1101 = 48kHz Table 49 Clocking and Sample Rate Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 74 WM8945 Production Data DIGITAL MIC CLOCKING When any GPIO is configured as DMICCLK output, the WM8945 outputs a clock which supports Digital Mic operation at the ADC sampling rate. Although the ADC is not used, the SYSCLK and Sample Rate control fields must still be set as they would for ADC operation. The clock frequencies for each of the sample rates is shown in Table 50 PCM SAMPLE RATE DMICCLK FS RATE 128fs 8kHz 1.024MHz 11.025kHz 1.411MHz 128fs 12kHz 1.536MHz 128fs 128fs 16kHz 2.048MHz 22.05kHz 2.8224MHz 128fs 24kHz 3.072MHz 128fs 32kHz 2.048MHz 64fs 44.1kHz 2.8224MHz 64fs 48kHz 3.072MHz 64fs Table 50 Digital Microphone Clock Frequencies FREQUENCY LOCKED LOOP (FLL) The integrated FLL can be used to generate SYSCLK from a wide variety of different reference sources and frequencies. The FLL uses MCLK as its reference, which may be a high frequency (e.g. 12.288MHz) or low frequency (e.g. 32,768kHz) reference. The FLL is tolerant of jitter and may be used to generate a stable SYSCLK from a less stable input signal. The FLL characteristics are summarised in “Electrical Characteristics”. The FLL is enabled using the FLL_ENA register bit. At initial power on the VMID voltage must be allowed to settle at its final vale before enabling the FLL. Note that, when changing FLL settings, it is recommended that the digital circuit be disabled via FLL_ENA and then re-enabled after the other register settings have been updated. When changing the input reference frequency FREF, it is recommended that the FLL be reset by setting FLL_ENA to 0. The field FLL_CLK_REF_DIV provides the option to divide the input reference (MCLK) by 1, 2, 4 or 8. This field should be set to bring the reference down to 13.5MHz or below. For best performance, it is recommended that the highest possible frequency – within the 13.5MHz limit – should be selected. The field FLL_CTRL_RATE controls internal functions within the FLL; it is recommended that only the default setting be used for this parameter. FLL_GAIN controls the internal loop gain and should be set to the recommended value. The FLL output frequency is directly determined from FLL_FRATIO, FLL_OUTDIV and the real number represented by FLL_N and FLL_K. The field FLL_N is an integer (LSB = 1); FLL_K is the fractional portion of the number (MSB = 0.5). The fractional portion is only valid when enabled by the field FLL_FRAC. Power consumption in the FLL is reduced in integer mode; however, the performance may also be reduced, with increased noise or jitter on the output. If low power consumption is required, then FLL settings must be chosen where N.K is an integer (i.e. FLL_K = 0). In this case, the fractional mode can be disabled by setting FLL_FRAC = 0. For best FLL performance, a non-integer value of N.K is required. In this case, the fractional mode must be enabled by setting FLL_FRAC = 1. The FLL settings must be adjusted, if necessary, to produce a non-integer value of N.K. The FLL output frequency is generated according to the following equation: FOUT = (FVCO / FLL_OUTDIV) w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 75 WM8945 Production Data The FLL operating frequency, FVCO is set according to the following equation: FVCO = (FREF x N.K x FLL_FRATIO) FREF is the input frequency, as determined by FLL_CLK_REF_DIV. FVCO must be in the range 90-100 MHz. Frequencies outside this range cannot be supported. Note that the output frequencies that do not lie within the ranges quoted above cannot be guaranteed across the full range of device operating temperatures. In order to follow the above requirements for FVCO, the value of FLL_OUTDIV should be selected according to the desired output FOUT, as described in Table 51. FLL_OUTDIV OUTPUT FREQUENCY FOUT 2.8125 MHz – 3.125 MHz 4h (divide by 32) 5.625 MHz – 6.25 MHz 3h (divide by 16) 11.25 MHz – 12.5 MHz 2h (divide by 8) 22.5 MHz – 25 MHz 1h (divide by 4) 45 MHz – 50 MHz 0h (divide by 2) Table 51 Selection of FLL_OUTDIV The value of FLL_FRATIO should be selected as described in Table 52. FLL_FRATIO REFERENCE FREQUENCY FREF 1MHz – 13.5MHz 0h (divide by 1) 256kHz – 1MHz 1h (divide by 2) 128kHz – 256kHz 2h (divide by 4) 16kHz – 128kHz 3h (divide by 8) Less than 16kHz 4h (divide by 16) Table 52 Selection of FLL_FRATIO In order to determine the remaining FLL parameters, the FLL operating frequency, FVCO, must be calculated, as given by the following equation: FVCO = (FOUT x FLL_OUTDIV) The value of FLL_N and FLL_K can then be determined as follows: N.K = FVCO / (FLL_FRATIO x FREF) Note that FREF is the input frequency, after division by FLL_CLK_REF_DIV, where applicable. In FLL Fractional Mode, the fractional portion of the N.K multiplier is held in the FLL_K register field. This field is coded as a fixed point quantity, where the MSB has a weighting of 0.5. Note that, if desired, the value of this field may be calculated by multiplying K by 2^16 and treating FLL_K as an integer value, as illustrated in the following example: If N.K = 8.192, then K = 0.192. Multiplying K by 2^16 gives 0.192 x 65536 = 12582.912 (decimal) = 3126 (hex). For best FLL performance, the FLL fractional mode is recommended. Therefore, if the calculations yield an integer value of N.K, then it is recommended to adjust FLL_FRATIO in order to obtain a noninteger value of N.K. Care must always be taken to ensure that the FLL operating frequency, FVCO, is within its recommended limits of 90-100 MHz. The register fields that control the FLL are described in Table 53. Example settings for a variety of reference frequencies and output frequencies are shown in Table 54. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 76 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R8 (08h) BIT 12:11 FLL Control 1 LABEL FLL_CLK_ DEFAULT 00 REF_DIV [1:0] DESCRIPTION FLL Clock Reference Divider 00 = MCLK / 1 01 = MCLK / 2 10 = MCLK / 4 11 = MCLK / 8 MCLK must be divided down to <=13.5MHz. For lower power operation, the reference clock can be divided down further if desired. 10:8 FLL_OUTDIV [2:0] 001 FOUT clock divider 000 = 2 001 = 4 010 = 8 011 = 16 100 = 32 101 = 64 110 = 128 111 = 256 (FOUT = FVCO / FLL_OUTDIV) 7:5 FLL_CTRL_ 000 Frequency of the FLL control block 000 = FVCO / 1 (Recommended value) RATE [2:0] 001 = FVCO / 2 010 = FVCO / 3 011 = FVCO / 4 100 = FVCO / 5 101 = FVCO / 6 110 = FVCO / 7 111 = FVCO / 8 Recommended that this register is not changed from default. 4:2 FLL_FRATIO [2:0] 000 FVCO clock divider 000 = 1 001 = 2 010 = 4 011 = 8 1XX = 16 000 recommended for FREF > 1MHz 100 recommended for FREF < 16kHz 011 recommended for all other cases 1 FLL_FRAC 1 Fractional enable 0 = Integer Mode 1 = Fractional Mode Integer mode offers reduced power consumption. Fractional mode offers best FLL performance, provided also that N.K is a non-integer value. 0 FLL_ENA 0 FLL Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 77 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R9 (09h) BIT 15:0 LABEL FLL_K[15:0] DEFAULT 3137h FLL Control 2 R10 (0Ah) DESCRIPTION Fractional multiply for FREF (MSB = 0.5) 14:5 FLL_N[9:0] 008h Integer multiply for FREF (LSB = 1) FLL Control 3 3:0 FLL_GAIN [3:0] 0100 Gain applied to error 0000 = x 1 (Recommended value) 0001 = x 2 0010 = x 4 0011 = x 8 0100 = x 16 0101 = x 32 0110 = x 64 0111 = x 128 1000 = x 256 Recommended that this register is set 0000. Table 53 Frequency Locked Loop Control EXAMPLE FLL CALCULATION To generate 24.576MHz output (FOUT) from a 12.000MHz reference clock (FREF): w Set FLL_CLK_REF_DIV in order to generate FREF <=13.5MHz: FLL_CLK_REF_DIV = 00 (divide by 1) Set FLL_CTRL_RATE to the recommended setting: FLL_CTRL_RATE = 000 (divide by 1) Sett FLL_GAIN to the recommended setting: FLL_GAIN = 0000 (multiply by 1) Set FLL_OUTDIV for the required output frequency as shown in Table 51:FOUT = 24.576MHz, therefore FLL_OUTDIV = 1h (divide by 4) Set FLL_FRATIO for the given reference frequency as shown in Table 52: FREF = 12MHz, therefore FLL_FRATIO = 0h (divide by 1) Calculate FVCO as given by FVCO = FOUT x FLL_OUTDIV:FVCO = 24.576 x 4 = 98.304MHz Calculate N.K as given by N.K = FVCO / (FLL_FRATIO x FREF): N.K = 98.304 / (1 x 12) = 8.192 Determine FLL_N and FLL_K from the integer and fractional portions of N.K:FLL_N is 8(dec) = 008(hex). FLL_K is 0.192 (dec) = 3127(hex). Confirm that N.K is a fractional quantity and set FLL_FRAC: N.K is fractional. Set FLL_FRAC = 1. Note that, if N.K is an integer, then an alternative value of FLL_FRATIO may be selected in order to produce a fractional value of N.K. PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 78 WM8945 Production Data EXAMPLE FLL SETTINGS Table 54 provides example FLL settings for generating common SYSCLK frequencies from a variety of low and high frequency reference inputs. FREF FOUT FLL_CLK_ REF_DIV FVCO FLL_N FLL_K FLL_ FRATIO FLL_ OUTDIV 8.000 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 705 0.6 16 4 kHz MHz (0h) MHz (2C1h) (9999h) (4h) (1h) 8.000 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 768 0.0 16 4 kHz MHz (0h) MHz (300h) (0000h) (4h) (1h) 32.768 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 344 0.53125 8 4 kHz MHz (0h) MHz (158h) (8800h) (3h) (1h) 32.768 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 375 0.0 8 4 kHz MHz (0h) MHz (177h) (0000h) (3h) (1h) 768.000 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 14 0.7 8 4 kHz MHz (0h) MHz (00Eh) (B333h) (3h) (1h) 768.000 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 16 0.0 8 4 kHz MHz (0h) MHz (010h) (0000h) (3h) (1h) 1.024 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 88 0.2 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (058h) (3333h) (0h) (1h) 1.024 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 96 0.0 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (060h) (0000h) (0h) (1h) 6.144 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 14 0.7 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (00Eh) (B333h) (0h) (1h) 6.144 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 16 0.0 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (010h) (0000h) (0h) (1h) 11.2896 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 8 0.0 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (008h) (0000h) (0h) (1h) 11.2896 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 8 0.70749 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (008h) (B51Eh) (0h) (1h) 12.000 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 7 0.5264 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (007h) (86C2h) (0h) (1h) 12.000 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 8 0.192 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (008h) (3127h) (0h) (1h) 12.288 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 7 0.35 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (007h) (599Ah) (0h) (1h) 12.288 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 8 0.0 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (008h) (0000h) (0h) (1h) 13.000 22.5792 divide by 1 90.3168 6 0.94745 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (006h) (F28Ch) (0h) (1h) 13.000 24.576 divide by 1 98.304 7 0.56185 1 4 MHz MHz (0h) MHz (007h) (8FD5h) (0h) (1h) 19.200 22.5792 divide by 2 90.3168 9 0.408 1 4 MHz MHz (1h) MHz (009h) (6873h) (0h) (1h) 19.200 24.576 divide by 2 98.304 10 0.24 1 4 MHz MHz (1h) MHz (00Ah) (3D71h) (0h) (1h) 27.000 22.5792 divide by 2 90.3168 6 0.69013 1 4 MHz MHz (1h) MHz (006h) (B0Adh) (0h) (1h) 27.000 24.576 divide by 2 98.304 7 0.28178 1 4 MHz MHz (1h) MHz (007h) (4823h) (0h) (1h) FLL_ FRAC 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 54 Example FLL Settings w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 79 WM8945 Production Data VIDEO BUFFER rd The WM8945 provides a current mode output video buffer with an input 3 order Butterworth low pass filter (LPF) and clamp. The video buffer is powered from LDOVDD – typically 3.3V. The video buffer is compatible with PAL and NTSC video formats. The low pass filter (LPF) is intended to remove images in the video DAC output waveform at multiples of the DAC clock frequency. The input clamp supports AC coupling at the input to the video buffer. Figure 32 Video Buffer Lowpass Filter Frequency Response Gain=0dB The current mode output employed by the WM8945 video buffer allows operation at lower supply voltages than voltage mode video buffers. The current mode output also provides inherent protection against short circuits during jack insertion and removal. A current reference resistor (positioned close to the WM8945) ensures that the signal swing at the output of the buffer is the same as that at the receiving equipment (e.g. a television set), thus providing excellent signal reproduction. For best performance, the input to the video buffer should be AC coupled and terminated to 75. Note that the input clamp and pull-down features described below are only applicable to the ACcoupled input configuration. Care should be taken with PCB layout, designing for at least 1GHz frequencies to avoid degrading performance. PCB vias and sharp corners should be avoided and parasitic capacitance ٛ minimised on signal paths; these should be kept as short and straight as possible. The LDOVDD supply should be decoupled as close to the WM8945 as possible. See the “External Components” section for more information. The video buffer is enabled using the VB_ENA register bit. The gain of the video buffer is selected using VB_GAIN; this can be set to 0dB or 6dB (corresponding to 6dB or 12dB unloaded). The LPF response can be adjusted by setting the VB_QBOOST register; this provides a small amount of additional gain in the region of the cut-off frequency. The input signal clamp is enabled using VB_CLAMP; this controls the DC component of the video signal for compatibility with the WM8945. The video buffer pull-down can be enabled using VB_PD; this may be used during power-up of the video buffer in order to align the signal levels between the source and the WM8945. Note that the pull-down should not be enabled during normal operation of the video buffer; it should be enabled when the video buffer is first powered up, and subsequently disabled (e.g. after 20ms) once the circuit has settled. A programmable DC offset can be applied to the output signal using the VB_DISOFF register field; this can be set to 0mV, 20mV or 40mV offset. Note that the VMID reference (see “Voltage References and Master Bias”) must be enabled when using the WM8945 video buffer. VMID is enabled by setting VMID_ENA, as defined in Table 39. The video buffer control registers are described in Table 55. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 80 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R38 (26h) BIT 7 LABEL VB_ENA DEFAULT 0 Video Buffer DESCRIPTION Video buffer enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 6 VB_QBOOST 0 Video buffer filter Q-Boost control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 5 VB_GAIN 0 Video buffer gain 0 = 0dB (=6dB unloaded) 1 = 6dB (=12dB unloaded) 4:3 VB_DISOFF 111 Video buffer DC offset control 000 = Reserved 001 = 40mV offset 010 = Reserved 011 = 20mV offset 100 = Reserved 101 = Reserved 110 = Reserved 111 = 0mV offset Note – the specified offset applies to the 0dB gain setting (VB_GAIN=0). When 6dB gain is selected, the DC offset is doubled. 1 VB_PD 0 Video buffer pull-down 0 = pull-down disabled 1 = pull-down enabled 0 VB_CLAMP 0 Enable the clamp between the video input and ground 0 = no clamp 1 = Video buffer input is clamped to ground Table 55 Video Buffer Control The video buffer circuit is illustrated in Figure 33. Figure 33 Video Buffer Block Diagram The video buffer requires two external resistor components, as illustrated in Figure 33. For best performance, the resistor RSOURCE should be matched (equal) to the load impedance RLOAD. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 81 WM8945 Production Data The resistance RREF is a function of the circuit gain and a function of the parallel combination of RSOURCE and RLOAD. When VB_GAIN = 0 (0dB gain), the current gain of the video buffer is 5, as described by the equation IVBOUT = 5 x IVBREF. The resistor RREF should be set equal to 5 x (RSOURCE // RLOAD), where (RSOURCE // RLOAD) is the effective resistance of the parallel combination of RSOURCE and RLOAD. (Note that the required resistance RREF is the same for both settings of VB_GAIN.) In a typical application, RLOAD = 75, RSOURCE = 75, RREF = 187. RECOMMENDED VIDEO BUFFER INITIALISATION SEQUENCE Power Up (Video signal AC coupled to Video Buffer input): ACTION LABEL REGISTER[BITS] Turn on external supplies and wait for the supply voltages to settle. Reset registers to default state (software reset) SW_RESET R0 (00h) [15:0] Enable VMID Fast Start and Start up Bias VMID_FAST_START = 1 R7 (07h) [11] STARTUP_BIAS_ENA = 1 R7 (07h) [8] Select Start-Up Bias and set VMID soft start for start-up ramp BIAS_SRC = 1 R7 (07h) [7] VMID_RAMP[1:0] = 01 R7 (07h) [6:5] LDO_REF_SEL_FAST = 1 LDO_BIAS_SRC = 1 R53 (35h) [14] R53 (35h) [5] LDO_ENA = 1 R53 (35h) [15] BIAS_ENA = 1 VMID_BUF_ENA = 1 R2 (02h) [3] R2 (02h) [2] VMID_SEL[1:0] = 11 R2 (02h) [1:0] VMID_ENA = 1 R7 (07h) [4] LDO_REF_SEL_FAST = 0 R53 (35h) [14] LDO_BIAS_SRC = 0 R53 (35h) [5] VMID_FAST_START = 0 R7 (07h) [11] STARTUP_BIAS_ENA = 0 R7 (07h) [8] VMID_SEL = 01 R2 (02h) [1:0] VMID_ENA = 1 R7 (07h) [4] LDO_REF_SEL_FAST = 0 R53 (35h) [14] LDO_BIAS_SRC = 0 R53 (35h) [5] Set Video Buffer Gain as required VB_GAIN R38 (26h) [5] Set Video Buffer Filter Q Boost as required VB_QBOOST R38 (26h) [6] Enable Video Buffer Clamp VB_CLAMP = 1 R38 (26h) [0] If using VMID as the reference voltage for the LDO then select VMID fast start or set to 0 if using the Bandgap as the reference voltage for LDO. Select LDO Start-Up Bias and enable LDO Delay 300ms for LDO to settle Enable VMID Buffer and Master Bias Set VMID_SEL[1:0] for fast start-up Enable VMID Delay 150ms to allow VMID to settle Set LDO for normal operation Set VMID for normal operation Set VMID divider for normal operation Enable VMID Delay 150ms to allow VMID to settle Set LDO for normal operation Enable Video Buffer Pulldown VB_PD = 1 R38 (26h) [1] Enable video buffer VB_ENA = 1 R38 (26h) [7] VB_PD = 0 R38 (26h) [1] Delay 20ms for buffer to capture input level Disable Video Buffer Pulldown w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 82 WM8945 Production Data Power Up (Video signal DC coupled to Video Buffer input): ACTION LABEL REGISTER[BITS] Turn on external supplies and wait for the supply voltages to settle. Reset registers to default state (software reset) SW_RESET R0 (00h) [15:0] Enable VMID Fast Start and Start up Bias VMID_FAST_START = 1 R7 (07h) [11] STARTUP_BIAS_ENA = 1 R7 (07h) [8] Select Start-Up Bias and set VMID soft start for start-up ramp BIAS_SRC = 1 R7 (07h) [7] VMID_RAMP[1:0] = 01 R7 (07h) [6:5] LDO_REF_SEL_FAST = 1 LDO_BIAS_SRC = 1 R53 (35h) [14] R53 (35h) [5] LDO_ENA = 1 R53 (35h) [15] BIAS_ENA = 1 VMID_BUF_ENA = 1 R2 (02h) [3] R2 (02h) [2] VMID_SEL[1:0] = 11 R2 (02h) [1:0] VMID_ENA = 1 R7 (07h) [4] LDO_REF_SEL_FAST = 0 R53 (35h) [14] LDO_BIAS_SRC = 0 R53 (35h) [5] VMID_FAST_START = 0 R7 (07h) [11] STARTUP_BIAS_ENA = 0 R7 (07h) [8] Set VMID divider for normal operation VMID_SEL = 01 R2 (02h) [1:0] Set Video Buffer Gain as required VB_GAIN R38 (26h) [5] Set Video Buffer Filter Q Boost as required VB_QBOOST R38 (26h) [6] Enable video buffer VB_ENA = 1 R38 (26h) [7] If using VMID as the reference voltage for the LDO then select VMID fast start or set to 0 if using the Bandgap as the reference voltage for LDO. Select LDO Start-Up Bias and enable LDO Delay 300ms for LDO to settle Enable VMID Buffer and Master Bias Set VMID_SEL[1:0] for fast start-up Enable VMID Delay 150ms to allow VMID to settle Set LDO for normal operation Set VMID for normal operation AUXILIARY ADC The WM8945 incorporates a low-power 12-bit Auxiliary ADC (AUXADC). This can be used to measure the SPKVDD supply voltage and to measure other analogue voltages connected to the AUX1 or AUX2 inputs. The Auxiliary ADC is powered from LDOVDD – typically 3.3V. The AUXADC is also used to perform Touch Panel measurements; these are interleaved with the AUXADC measurement requests; see “Touch Panel Controller” for further details. The AUXADC is powered on the TPVDD (internal) power domain; internal resistor dividers enable SPKVDD voltages greater TPVDD to be measured by the AUXADC. AUXADC CONTROL The AUXADC is enabled by setting the AUX_ENA register bit. The AUXADC measurements can be initiated manually or automatically. For automatic operation, the AUX_RATE register is set according to the required conversion rate, and conversions are enabled by setting the AUX_CVT_ENA bit. For manual operation, the AUX_RATE register is set to 00h, and each manual conversion is initiated by setting the AUX_CVT_ENA bit. In manual mode, the AUX_CVT_ENA bit is reset by the WM8945 after each conversion request. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 83 WM8945 Production Data The AUXADC has 3 available input sources, which are SPKVDD, AUX1 and AUX2. Each of these inputs is enabled by setting the respective bit in the AuxADC Source Register (R62). The WM8945 provides options to select the scaling and voltage reference for these inputs; these are described in Table 57. Note that the AUX1 and AUX2 pins should not be used as AUXADC inputs if they are used as audio inputs. (See “Input Signal Path”.) For each AUXADC measurement event (in Manual or Automatic modes), the WM8945 selects the next enabled input source. Any number of inputs may be selected simultaneously; the AUXADC will measure each on in turn. Note that only a single AUXADC measurement is made on any Manual or Automatic trigger. The control fields associated with initiating AUXADC measurements are defined in Table 56. REGISTER ADDRESS R61 (3Dh) BIT 15 LABEL AUX_ENA DEFAULT 0 AuxADC Control DESCRIPTION AUXADC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 14 AUX_CVT_ENA 0 AUXADC Conversion Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled In automatic mode, conversions are enabled by setting this bit. In manual mode (AUX_RATE = 0), setting this bit will initiate a conversion; the bit is reset automatically. 4:0 AUX_RATE [4:0] 0_0000 AUXADC Conversion Rate 0_0000 = Manual conversion 0_0001 = 16Hz 0_0010 = 32Hz …(16Hz steps) 1_1111 = 496Hz R62 (3Eh) 8 AUX_BATT_SEL 0 AuxADC Source AUXADC Battery (SPKVDD) input select 0 = Disable Battery (SPKVDD) measurement 1 = Enable Battery (SPKVDD) measurement 1 AUX_AUX2_SE L 0 AUX_AUX1_SE L 0 AUXADC AUX2 input select 0 = Disable AUX2 measurement 1 = Enable AUX2 measurement 0 AUXADC AUX1 input select 0 = Disable AUX1 measurement 1 = Enable AUX1 measurement Table 56 AUXADC Control AUXADC INPUT CONFIGURATION For inputs AUX1 and AUX2, the AUXADC uses either LDOVDD/2 or the 1.5V (nominal) bandgap as a reference. This is selected independently for each AUX input, as described in Table 57. Selecting the bandgap as a reference provides additional immunity to any noise on the supply rails. The internal bandgap reference is nominally 1.5V. Note that this value is not trimmed and may vary significantly (+/-10%) between different devices. When using this reference, the internal bandgap reference must be enabled by setting the BG_ENA register, as described in Table 57. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 84 WM8945 Production Data For SPKVDD measurement, the SPKVDD voltage is connected to a potential divider in order to reduce it to a suitable level. Two different scaling factors are available, controlled by the AUX_BATT_SCALE register bit. The scaling factor should be selected such that the scaled output is less than the maximum measurable level (LDOVDD). For optimum measurement of the SPKVDD voltage, the SPKVDD potential divider can be connected to the AUX1 pin, allowing an external capacitor to be used to filter noise from the SPKVDD supply. This is enabled by setting the AUX_AUX1_FILTB register bit. This option can only be used when AUX1 is not also used as an input to the AUXADC. REGISTER ADDRESS R54 (36h) BIT 15 LABEL BG_ENA DEFAULT 0 Bandgap DESCRIPTION Bandgap Reference Control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R63 (3Fh) 9 AuxADC Config AUX_AUX1_ 0 FILTB AUXADC Battery (SPKVDD) measurement filter control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled When AUX_AUX1_FILTB is set, the Battery (SPKVDD) measurement point is connected to the AUX1 pin, allowing an external capacitor to be used to filter noise. 8 AUX_BATT_ 1 SCALE AUXADC Battery (SPKVDD) measurement divider control 0 = 0.45 x SPKVDD (Note that 0.45 x 3.3V = 1.485V) 1 = 0.41 x SPKVDD (Note that 0.41 x 3.6V = 1.476V) 1 AUX_AUX2_ 0 REF AUXADC AUX2 reference select 0 = LDOVDD/2 1 = 1.5V (nominal) Bandgap 0 AUX_AUX1_ REF 0 AUXADC AUX1 reference select 0 = LDOVDD/2 1 = 1.5V (nominal) Bandgap Table 57 AUXADC Input Configuration AUXADC READBACK Measured data from the AUXADC is read via the AuxADC Data Register (R60), which contains two fields. The AUXADC Data Source is indicated in the AUX_DATA_SRC field; the associated measurement data is contained in the AUX_DATA field. Reading from the AuxADC Data Register returns a 12-bit code which represents the most recent AUXADC measurement on the associated channel. It should be noted that every time an AUXADC measurement is written to the AuxADC Data Register, the previous data is overwritten – the host processor should ensure that data is read from this register before it is overwritten. The 12-bit AUX_DATA field can be equated to the actual voltage by scaling according to the applicable reference source. The full-scale value of AUX_DATA corresponds to the LDOVDD voltage level. The AUXADC interrupts can be used to indicate when new data is available – see “Interrupts”. A GPIO pin configured as “AUX_DONE” can also be used to indicate when new data is available – see “General Purpose Input / Output”. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 85 WM8945 Production Data In a typical application, it is anticipated that the AUXADC Interrupt or GPIO flag would be used to control the AUXADC readback – the host processor should read the AUXADC Data Register in response to the AUXADC event. In Automatic AUXADC mode, the processor should complete this action before the next measurement occurs, in order to avoid losing any AUXADC samples. In Manual conversion mode, the interrupt signal provides confirmation that the commanded measurement has been completed. The control fields associated with AUXADC readback are defined in Table 58. REGISTER ADDRESS R60 (3Ch) BIT 13:12 Aux ADC Data LABEL AUX_DATA_ DEFAULT 00 SRC [1:0] DESCRIPTION AUXADC Data Source 00 = No measurement 01 = AUX1 10 = AUX2 11 = SPKVDD 11:0 AUX_DATA [11:0] 000h AUXADC data (12 bit unsigned data) Table 58 AUXADC Readback TOUCH PANEL CONTROLLER The WM8945 incorporates a Touch Panel controller interface, for use with standard 4-wire Touch Panels. The controller supports X, Y co-ordinate measurement, Pen Down detection and Touch Pressure (Z-axis) measurement. The Touch Panel controller provides high resolution ٛ digitiser measurements, using the same 12-bit AUXADC as described earlier (see “Auxiliary ADC”). Touch Panel conversion requests are interleaved with AUXADC measurement requests. Touch Panel Interrupts can be generated on completion of a set of measurements, or on Pen Down detection. Read access to the Touch Panel measurement data is controlled in order to ensure the host always reads a complete set of data, and does not read mixed data that relates to separate measurement events. An overview of Touch Panel operating principles is provided at the end of this section. TOUCH PANEL CONTROL The Touch Panel is enabled by setting the TCH_ENA register bit. The Touch Panel measurements can be initiated manually or automatically. For automatic operation, the TCH_RATE register is set according to the required conversion rate, and measurements are enabled by setting the TCH_CVT_ENA bit. For manual operation, the TCH_RATE register is set to 00h, and a set of measurements is initiated by setting the TCH_CVT_ENA bit. In manual mode, the TCH_CVT_ENA bit is reset by the WM8945 after each conversion request. The Touch Panel ‘Pen Down’ detection can be used to control measurements in automatic mode. When TCH_PDONLY is set, then automatic conversions will only be scheduled when ‘Pen Down’ is detected. Note that manual conversion commands are not affected by TCH_PDONLY. For each Touch Panel measurement event (in Manual or Automatic modes), the WM8945 performs a set of measurements encompassing all enabled input sources; the X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis measurements are enabled using the TCH_X_ENA, TCH_Y_ENA and TCH_Z_ENA register bits respectively. To allow settling time between consecutive measurements, a programmable delay is applied between the X, Y and Z-axis measurements; this is set using the TCH_DELAY field. Pressure measurement uses a constant current source to measure the resistance between the top and bottom sheets of the touch panel. The current is selectable using TCH_ISEL, to suit different types of touch panel. Pen Down detection sensitivity can be controlled using TCH_RPU. Decreasing the resistance makes the touch panel less sensitive; increasing the resistance makes the touch panel more sensitive. The control fields associated with initiating Touch Panel measurements are defined in Table 59. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 86 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R55 (37h) BIT 15 LABEL TCH_ENA DEFAULT 0 Touch Control 1 DESCRIPTION Touch Panel Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 14 TCH_CVT_ENA 0 Touch Panel Conversion Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled In automatic mode, conversions are enabled by setting this bit. In manual mode (TCH_RATE = 0), setting this bit will initiate a set of conversion; the bit is reset automatically. 10 TCH_Z_ENA 0 Enables Z-axis touch panel measurements. 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 9 TCH_Y_ENA 0 Enables Y-axis touch panel measurements 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 8 TCH_X_ENA 0 Enables X-axis touch panel measurements 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7:5 TCH_DELAY [2:0] 000 Settling time between X, Y and Z measurements. (Nominal timing only; typically +/-20% of quoted values.) 000 = 30us 001 = 60us 010 = 120us 011 = 240us 100 = 480us 101 = 960us 110 = 1920us 111 = 3840us 4:0 TCH_RATE [4:0] 0_0000 Touch Panel Rate 0_0000 = Manual conversion 0_0001 = 16kHz 0_0010 = 32kHz …(16kHz steps) 1_1111 = 496kHz R56 (38h) 11 TCH_PDONLY 0 Touch Control 2 Select Automatic conversions only when Pen Down is detected. (No effect on Manual conversion.) 0 = Normal 1 = Pen-Down only 8 TCH_ISEL 0 Pressure measurement current select 0 = 230uA 1 = 460uA w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 87 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT 3:0 LABEL TCH_RPU [3:0] DEFAULT 0111 DESCRIPTION Pen-Down sensitivity (pull-up resistor) 0000 = 64k (most sensitive) 0001 = 64k / 2 0010 = 64k / 3 0011 = 64k / 4 …. 1111 = 64k / 16 (least sensitive) Table 59 Touch Panel Control TOUCH PANEL READBACK Measured data from the Touch Panel controller is read via the Touch Data registers. The X-axis, Yaxis and Z-axis (pressure) measurements are provided in the TCH_X, TCH_Y and TCH_Z registers respectively. The TCH_PD1, TCH_PD2 and TCH_PD3 bits indicate whether the Pen Down status was asserted when the measurement set was made. To read a set of Touch Panel measurements, the host processor must access each of the applicable Touch Data registers. When the host processor starts to read these registers, the WM8945 will inhibit any new touch panel measurements until the host processor has read all of the applicable registers. This ensures that the data read by the host processor all relates to the same set of measurements. If all 3 touch panel channels are selected (using TCH_X_ENA, TCH_Y_ENA and TCH_Z_ENA) then all 3 Touch Data registers must be read before further measurements are permitted. If fewer channels are selected, then only those selected channels need to be read before touch panel measurements are enabled again. The touch panel inhibit (preventing new touch panel measurements) commences when any of the Touch Data registers is read. The touch panel inhibit ceases when all selected Touch Data registers have been read. The Touch Panel interrupts can be used to indicate when new data is available or if “Pen Down” is detected – see “Interrupts”. A GPIO pin configured as “TCH_DONE” or “PDOWN” can also be used to indicate these events – see “General Purpose Input / Output”. The control fields associated with Touch Panel readback are defined in Table 60. REGISTER ADDRESS R57 (39h) BIT 15 LABEL TCH_PD1 DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 0 Pen down status (indicates if the Pen Down was detected prior to the TP measurement) Touch Data X 0 = Pen Down not detected 1 = Pen Down detected 11:0 R58 (3Ah) 15 TCH_X [11:0] TCH_PD2 000h 0 Touch Data Y Touch panel X-axis data Pen down status (indicates if the Pen Down was detected prior to the TP measurement) 0 = Pen Down not detected 1 = Pen Down detected 11:0 R59 (3Bh) 15 TCH_Y [11:0] TCH_PD3 000h 0 Touch Data Z Touch panel Y-axis data Pen down status (indicates if the Pen Down was detected prior to the TP measurement) 0 = Pen Down not detected 1 = Pen Down detected 11:0 TCH_Z [11:0] 000h Touch panel Z-axis data Table 60 Touch Panel Readback w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 88 WM8945 Production Data TOUCH PANEL OPERATING PRINCIPLES A typical Touch Panel comprises two conductive sheets, connected via a switch matrix to the Touch Panel supply voltage. When the Touch Panel is touched (usually with a pen-style pointer), an electrical contact is made between the two sheets. The switch matrix is used to determine the position of the pen contact by establishing a potential divider on one of the conductive sheets in either the Xaxis or Y-axis, and measuring the voltage on the other sheet. Separate configuration is required for each axis measurement; these are configured one after the other to determine the X and Y co-ordinate positions. Note that, due to the ratiometric measurement method, the supply voltage does not affect the measurement accuracy in either axis. Pen Down detection and Z-axis (pressure) measurements are achieved in a similar fashion, by configuring the switch matrix and taking the appropriate voltage measurement via an ADC. The Touch Panel interface connects to the Left / Right sides of one sheet and to the Top / Bottom sides of the other sheet. The illustrations show the top sheet for X-axis and the bottom sheet for Yaxis, but the reverse is also possible. X-axis measurement is performed by applying a potential difference between the Left and Right sides of the touch panel. When contact is made between the two sheets, the voltage present on the Top or Bottom connections is a measure of the X-axis position of the contact. The configuration is illustrated in Figure 34. Figure 34 X-axis Touch Panel Measurement Y-axis measurement is performed by applying a potential difference between the Top and Bottom sides of the touch panel. When contact is made between the two sheets, the voltage present on the Left or Right connections is a measure of the Y-axis position of the contact. The configuration is illustrated in Figure 35. Figure 35 Y-axis Touch Panel Measurement ‘Pen Down’ detection uses a zero-power comparator with an internal, programmable pull-up resistor. When the touch panel is not being touched, no current flows between the touch panel sheets, and the comparator output is low. When the touch panel is touched, current flows through the panel and through the pull-up resistor, and the comparator output goes high. The sensitivity of the circuit can be adjusted using different values of pull-up resistor; a large pull-up resistance leads to the most sensitive response. The configuration is illustrated in Figure 36. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 89 WM8945 Production Data Figure 36 Pen-Down Touch Panel Detection Touch pressure can only be determined indirectly, using the results of two separate measurements. A constant current is applied through the plates, and the voltage on each plate is measured. The difference between the two voltages is proportional to the resistance between the plates, which is a measure of the pressure being applied to the panel. The configuration is illustrated in Figure 37. In this example, a constant current flows from the Top (YP) connection to the Left (XN) connection. The Right (XP) and Bottom (YN) points are measured in turn, and the difference, VX – VY is equal to IP x RC, where IP is the current applied and RC is the resistance between the plates. The smaller the measured resistance, the greater the pressure being applied. Figure 37 Z-axis (Pressure) Touch Panel Measurement GENERAL PURPOSE INPUT/OUTPUT The WM8945 provides four multi-function pins which can be configured to provide a number of different functions. These are digital input/output pins on the DBVDD power domain. The GPIO pins are: GPIO1 CS ¯¯ /GPIO2 CIFMODE/GPIO3 SDOUT/GPIO4 Note that only GPIO1 is a dedicated GPIO pin; the other pins are shared with Control Interface functions. The pins available for GPIO function depend on the selected Control Interface mode, as described in Table 61. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 90 WM8945 Production Data CONTROL INTERFACE MODE GPIO PIN AVAILABILITY 2-wire (I2C) GPIO1 GPIO2 GPIO3 GPIO4 GPIO4 3-wire (SPI) GPIO1 GPIO3 4-wire (SPI) GPIO1 GPIO3 Table 61 GPIO Pin Availability Note that CIFMODE/GPIO3 pin selects between I2C and SPI Control Interface modes (see “Control Interface”). To enable GPIO functions on GPIO3, the MODE_GPIO register bit must be set in order to disconnect this pin from the Control Interface circuit. Setting the MODE_GPIO register bit causes the Control Interface mode selection to be latched; it will remain latched until a Software Reset or Power On Reset occurs. The register fields that control the GPIO pins are described in Table 62. For each GPIO, the selected function is determined by the GPn_FN field, where n identifies the GPIO pin (1 to 4). The pin direction, set by GPn_DIR, must be set according to function selected by GPn_SEL. When a pin is configured as a GPIO output, its level can be set to logic 0 or logic 1 using the GPn_LVL field. When a pin is configured as a GPIO input, the logic level can be read from the respective GPn_LVL bit. The GPIO output is inverted with respect to the GPn_LVL register when the polarity bit GPn_POL is set; the equivalent is true of GPIO inputs also. Internal pull-up and pull-down resistors may be enabled using the GPn_PULL fields; this allows greater flexibility to interface with different signals from other devices. Each of the GPIO pins is an input to the Interrupt control circuit and can be used to trigger an Interrupt event. This may be configured as level-triggered or edge-triggered using the GPn_FN registers. Edge detect raises an interrupt when the GPIO status changes; level detect asserts the interrupt for as long as the GPIO status is asserted. See “Interrupts”. An edge-triggered GPIO can be configured to trigger on a single edge or on both edges of the input signal; this is selected using the GPn_INT_MODE registers. A level-triggered or single-edge-triggered input may be configured using the GPn_POL registers to respond to a high level/edge (when GPn_POL = 0) or a low level/edge (when GPn_POL = 1). The GPIO control fields are defined in Table 60. REGISTER ADDRESS R11 (0Bh) BIT 0 LABEL GPIO_MODE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 0 CIFMODE/GPIO3 pin configuration GPIO Config 0 = Pin configured as CIFMODE 1 = Pin configured as GPIO3 Note – when this bit is set to 1, it is latched and cannot be reset until Power-Off or Software Reset. R12 (0Ch) 15 GP1_DIR 1 GPIO1 Control GPIO1 Pin Direction 0 = Output 1 = Input 14:13 GP1_PULL [1:0] 00 GPIO1 pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 GP1_INT_ MODE 0 GPIO1 Interrupt Mode 0 = GPIO interrupt is rising edge triggered (if GP1_POL=0) or falling edge triggered (if GP1_POL =1) 1 = GPIO interrupt is triggered on rising and falling edges w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 91 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT 10 LABEL GP1_POL DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION GPIO1 Polarity Select 0 = Non-inverted 1 = Inverted 5 GP1_LVL 0 GPIO1 level. Write to this bit to set a GPIO output. Read from this bit to read GPIO input level. When GP1_POL is set, the register contains the opposite logic level to the external pin. 3:0 GP1_FN [3:0] 15 GP2_DIR 0000 GPIO1 Pin Function (see Table 63 for details) R13 (0Dh) 1 GPIO2 Control GPIO2 Pin Direction 0 = Output 1 = Input 14:13 GP2_PULL [1:0] 00 GPIO2 pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 GP2_INT_ 0 MODE GPIO2 Interrupt Mode 0 = GPIO interrupt is rising edge triggered (if GP2_POL=0) or falling edge triggered (if GP2_POL =1) 1 = GPIO interrupt is triggered on rising and falling edges 10 GP2_POL 0 GPIO2 Polarity Select 0 = Non-inverted 1 = Inverted 5 GP2_LVL 0 GPIO2 level. Write to this bit to set a GPIO output. Read from this bit to read GPIO input level. When GP2_POL is set, the register contains the opposite logic level to the external pin. 3:0 GP2_FN [3:0] 15 GP3_DIR 0000 GPIO2 Pin Function (see Table 63 for details) R14 (0Eh) 1 GPIO3 Control GPIO3 Pin Direction 0 = Output 1 = Input 14:13 GP3_PULL [1:0] 10 GPIO3 pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 GP3_INT_ 0 MODE GPIO3 Interrupt Mode 0 = GPIO interrupt is rising edge triggered (if GP3_POL=0) or falling edge triggered (if GP3_POL =1) 1 = GPIO interrupt is triggered on rising and falling edges 10 GP3_POL 0 GPIO3 Polarity Select 0 = Non-inverted 1 = Inverted w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 92 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT 5 LABEL GP3_LVL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 0 GPIO3 level. Write to this bit to set a GPIO output. Read from this bit to read GPIO input level. When GP3_POL is set, the register contains the opposite logic level to the external pin. 3:0 GP3_FN [3:0] 15 GP4_DIR 0000 GPIO3 Pin Function (see Table 63 for details) R15 (0Fh) 1 GPIO4 Control GPIO4 Pin Direction 0 = Output 1 = Input 14:13 GP4_PULL [1:0] 00 GPIO4 pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 GP4_INT_ 0 MODE GPIO4 Interrupt Mode 0 = GPIO interrupt is rising edge triggered (if GP4_POL=0) or falling edge triggered (if GP4_POL =1) 1 = GPIO interrupt is triggered on rising and falling edges 10 GP4_POL 0 GPIO4 Polarity Select 0 = Non-inverted 1 = Inverted 5 GP4_LVL 0 GPIO4 level. Write to this bit to set a GPIO output. Read from this bit to read GPIO input level. When GP4_POL is set, the register contains the opposite logic level to the external pin. 3:0 GP4_FN [3:0] 0000 GPIO4 Pin Function (see Table 63 for details) Table 62 GPIO Control GPIO FUNCTION SELECT The available GPIO functions are described in Table 63. The function of each GPIO is set using the GPn_FN register, where n identifies the GPIO pin (1 to 4). Note that the polarity of the GPIO inputs and outputs may be selected using the GPn_POL register bits. When GPn_POL = 1, then the polarity is inverted with respect to the descriptions below. The GPIO input functions may be used to detect headphone jack insertion or a button press. These signals may be used as inputs to the Interrupt Controller, via the integrated de-bounce circuit. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 93 WM8945 Production Data GPn_FN DESCRIPTION COMMENTS 0000 Logic level input External logic level is read from GPn_LVL. 0001 Edge detection input External logic level is read from GPn_LVL. Associated interrupt (when enabled) is level-triggered. Associated interrupt (when enabled) is edge triggered. Note that TOCLK_ENA must be set. 0010 CLKOUT output Output clock frequency is set by CLKOUT_DIV. 0011 Interrupt (IRQ) output Hardware output of all unmasked Interrupts. 0100 Pen Down output Indicates Touch Panel Pen Down detection. This flag is asserted whenever the Pen is in contact with the Touch Panel. 0101 Touch Panel measurement complete Indicates a set of Touch Panel measurements has been completed. This function provides a pulse when new Touch Panel measurement data is ready. The pulse duration is approximately 1.95s. 0110 Auxiliary ADC measurement complete Indicates a new Auxiliary ADC measurement has been completed. This function provides a pulse when new AUXADC measurement data is ready. The pulse duration is approximately 1.95s. 0111 Temperature flag output Indicates the temperature sensor output. This is a hardware output of the TEMP_STS bit (assuming GPn_POL = 0). 0 = Normal 1 = Overtemperature 1000 Reserved 1001 DMICCLK output Output clock for digital microphone interface 1010 Logic level output Pin logic level is set by GPn_LVL. 1011 LDO_UV output Indicates the LDO undervoltage status. This is a hardware output of the LDO_UV_STS bit (assuming GPn_POL = 0). 0 = Normal 1 = LDO undervoltage 1100 Reserved 1101 Reserved 1110 Reserved 1111 Reserved Table 63 GPIO Function Select w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 94 WM8945 Production Data INTERRUPTS The Interrupt Controller has multiple inputs. These include the GPIO input pins, Temperature sensor, Auxiliary ADC, Touch Panel and the LDO Regulator. Any combination of these inputs can be used to trigger an Interrupt (IRQ) event. There is an Interrupt Status field associated with each of the IRQ inputs. These are listed within the System Interrupts Register (R16), as described in Table 64. The status of the IRQ inputs can be read at any time from this register or else in response to the Interrupt (IRQ) output being signalled via a GPIO pin. Individual mask bits can select or deselect different functions from the Interrupt controller. These are listed within the System Interrupts Mask Register (R19), as described in Table 64. Note that the status fields remain valid, even when masked, but the masked bits will not cause the Interrupt (IRQ) output to be asserted. The Interrupt (IRQ) output represents the logical ‘OR’ of all the unmasked IRQ inputs. The bits within the System Interrupts Register (R16) are latching fields and, once they are set, they are not reset until the System Interrupts Register is read. Accordingly, the Interrupt (IRQ) output is not reset until the System Interrupts Register has been read. Note that, if the condition that caused the IRQ input to be asserted is still valid, then the Interrupt (IRQ) output will remain set even after the System Interrupts Register has been read. When GPIO input is used to trigger an Interrupt event, polarity can be set using the GPn_POL bits as described in Table 62. This allows the IRQ event to be used to indicate a rising or a falling edge of the external logic signal. If desired, the GPn_INT_MODE bits can be used to select an Interrupt event on both the rising and falling edges. The GPIO inputs to the Interrupt Controller are de-bounced to avoid false detections. The timeout clock (TOCLK) is required for this function. When using GPIO inputs to the Interrupt Controller, the TOCLK must be enabled by setting the TOCLK_ENA and OSC_CLK_ENA bits as described in “Clocking and Sample Rates”. The Interrupt (IRQ) output can be globally masked by setting the IM_IRQ register. The Interrupt is masked by default. The Interrupt (IRQ) output may be configured on any of the GPIO pins. See “General Purpose Input / Output” for details of how to configure GPIO pins for Interrupt (IRQ) output. The Interrupt control fields are defined in Table 64. REGISTER ADDRESS R16 (10h) BIT 15 LABEL TEMP_INT DEFAULT 0 System Interrupts DESCRIPTION Thermal Interrupt status 0 = Thermal interrupt not set 1 = Thermal interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 14 GP4_INT 0 GPIO4 Interrupt status 0 = GPIO4 interrupt not set 1 = GPIO4 interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 13 GP3_INT 0 GPIO3 Interrupt status 0 = GPIO3 interrupt not set 1 = GPIO3 interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 12 GP2_INT 0 GPIO2 Interrupt status 0 = GPIO2 interrupt not set 1 = GPIO2 interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 95 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT 11 LABEL GP1_INT DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION GPIO1 Interrupt status 0 = GPIO1 interrupt not set 1 = GPIO1 interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 10 TCHDATA_INT 0 Touch Panel Data Ready Interrupt 0 = Touch Panel Data Ready interrupt not set 1 = Touch Panel Data Ready interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 9 TCHPD_INT 0 Touch Panel pen down Interrupt 0 = Touch Panel Pen Down interrupt not set 1 = Touch Panel Pen Down interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 8 AUXADC_INT 0 AUXADC Data Ready Interrupt 0 = AUXADC Data Ready interrupt not set 1 = AUXADC Data Ready interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 0 LDO_UV_INT 0 LDO Undervoltage Interrupt 0 = LDO Undervoltage interrupt not set 1 = LDO Undervoltage interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. R18 (12h) 0 IM_IRQ 1 IRQ Config IRQ (GPIO output) Mask 0 = Normal 1 = IRQ output is masked R19 (13h) System Interrupts Mask 15 IM_TEMP_INT 0 Interrupt mask for thermal status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 14 IM_GP4_INT 0 Interrupt mask for GPIO4 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 13 IM_GP3_INT 0 Interrupt mask for GPIO3 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 12 IM_GP2_INT 0 Interrupt mask for GPIO2 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 11 IM_GP1_INT 0 Interrupt mask for GPIO1 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 10 IM_TCHDATA_ INT 0 Interrupt mask for Touch Panel Data Ready status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 96 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 9 IM_TCHPD_INT 0 Interrupt mask for Touch Panel Pen Down status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 8 IM_AUXADC_ 0 INT Interrupt mask for AUXADC Data Ready status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 0 IM_LDO_UV_ 0 INT Interrupt mask for LDO Undervoltage status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked Table 64 Interrupt Control CONTROL INTERFACE The WM8945 is controlled by writing to its control registers. Readback is available for all registers. The Control Interface can operate as either a 2-, 3- or 4-wire interface: 2-wire (I2C) mode uses pins SCLK and SDA 3-wire (SPI) mode uses pins CS ¯¯ , SCLK and SDA 4-wire (SPI) mode uses pins CS ¯¯ , SCLK, SDA and SDOUT Readback is provided on the bi-directional pin SDA in 2-/3-wire modes. The device address in 2-wire (I2C) mode is 34h. The WM8945 uses 15-bit register addresses and 16-bit data in all Control Interface modes. SELECTION OF CONTROL INTERFACE MODE The WM8945 Control Interface can be configured for I2C mode or SPI modes using the CIFMODE/GPIO3 pin at power-up. The mode selection is as described in Table 66. CIFMODE/GPIO3 INTERFACE FORMAT Low 2 wire High 3- or 4- wire Table 65 Control Interface Mode Selection After the Control Interface Mode has been configured, the MODE_GPIO register bit should be set in order to latch the selection and to allow GPIO functions to be supported on the CIFMODE/GPIO3 pin. After the MODE_GPIO register bit has been set, the Control Interface mode selection will remain latched until a Software Reset or Power On Reset occurs. See “General Purpose Input / Output” for details. In 2-wire (I2C) Control Interface mode, Auto-Increment mode may be selected. This enables multiple write and multiple read operations to be scheduled faster than is possible with single register operations. The auto-increment option is enabled when the AUTO_INC register bit is set. This bit is defined in Table 66. Auto-increment is disabled by default. In SPI modes, 3-wire or 4-wire operation may be selected using the SPI_4WIRE register bit. In 3-wire mode, register readback is provided using the bi-directional pin SDA. In 4-wire mode, register readback is provided using SDOUT. The SDOUT pin may be configured as CMOS or as Open Drain using the SPI_OD bit. In 3-wire mode the SDA pin may be configured as CMOS or as Open Drain w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 97 WM8945 Production Data using the SPI_OD bit. If the open drain option is selected (SPI_OD = 1) then an external pull-up resistor is required on the SDOUT or SDA output pin. The Control Interface configuration bits are described in Table 66. REGISTER ADDRESS R20 (14h) BIT 2 LABEL SPI_OD DEFAULT 0 Control Interface DESCRIPTION SDOUT pin configuration (applies to 3-wire and 4-wire mode only) 0 = SDOUT output is CMOS 1 = SDOUT output is open drain 1 SPI_4WIRE 1 SPI control mode select 0 = 3-wire using bidirectional SDA 1 = 4-wire using SDOUT 0 AUTO_INC 0 Enables address auto-increment (applies to 2-wire / I2C mode only) 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Table 66 Control Interface Configuration 2-WIRE (I2C) CONTROL MODE In 2-wire mode, the WM8945 is a slave device on the control interface; SCLK is a clock input, while SDA is a bi-directional data pin. To allow arbitration of multiple slaves (and/or multiple masters) on the same interface, the WM8945 transmits logic 1 by tri-stating the SDA pin, rather than pulling it high. An external pull-up resistor is required to pull the SDA line high so that the logic 1 can be recognised by the master. In order to allow many devices to share a single 2-wire control bus, every device on the bus has a unique 7-bit device ID (this is not the same as the 15-bit address of each register in the WM8945). The WM8945 device ID is 34h. The LSB of the device ID is the Read/Write bit; this bit is set to logic 1 for “Read” and logic 0 for “Write”. The WM8945 operates as a slave device only. The controller indicates the start of data transfer with a high to low transition on SDA while SCLK remains high. This indicates that a device ID, register address and data will follow. The WM8945 responds to the start condition and shifts in the next eight bits on SDA (7-bit device ID + Read/Write bit, MSB first). If the device ID received matches the device ID of the WM8945, then the WM8945 responds by pulling SDA low on the next clock pulse (ACK). If the device ID is not recognised or the R/W bit is ‘1’ when operating in write only mode, the WM8945 returns to the idle condition and waits for a new start condition and valid address. If the device ID matches the device ID of the WM8945, the data transfer continues as described below. The controller indicates the end of data transfer with a low to high transition on SDA while SCLK remains high. After receiving a complete address and data sequence the WM8945 returns to the idle state and waits for another start condition. If a start or stop condition is detected out of sequence at any point during data transfer (i.e. SDA changes while SCLK is high), the device returns to the idle condition. The WM8945 supports the following read and write operations: Single write Single read Multiple write using auto-increment Multiple read using auto-increment The sequence of signals associated with a single register write operation is illustrated in Figure 38. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 98 WM8945 Production Data Figure 38 Control Interface 2-wire (I2C) Register Write The sequence of signals associated with a single register read operation is illustrated in Figure 39. Figure 39 Control Interface 2-wire (I2C) Register Read The Control Interface also supports other register operations, as listed above. The interface protocol for these operations is summarised below. The terminology used in the following figures is detailed in Table 67. Note that, for multiple write and multiple read operations, the auto-increment option must be enabled. This feature is enabled by default, as noted in Table 66. TERMINOLOGY DESCRIPTION S Start Condition Sr Repeated start A Acknowledge P Stop Condition R/W ReadNotWrite 0 = Write 1 = Read [White field] Data flow from bus master to WM8945 [Grey field] Data flow from WM8945 to bus master Table 67 Control Interface Terminology Figure 40 Single Register Write to Specified Address w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 99 WM8945 Production Data Figure 41 Single Register Read from Specified Address Figure 42 Multiple Register Write to Specified Address using Auto-increment Figure 43 Multiple Register Read from Specified Address using Auto-increment Figure 44 Multiple Register Read from Last Address using Auto-increment Multiple Write and Multiple Read operations enable the host processor to access sequential blocks of the data in the WM8945 register map faster than is possible with single register operations. The autoincrement option is enabled when the AUTO_INC register bit is set. This bit is defined in Table 66. Auto-increment is disabled by default. 3-WIRE (SPI) CONTROL MODE The 3-wire control interface uses the CS ¯¯ , SCLK and SDA pins. In 3-wire control mode, a control word consists of 32 bits. The first bit is the read/write bit (R/W), which is followed by 15 address bits (A14 to A0) that determine which control register is accessed. The remaining 16 bits (B15 to B0) are data bits, corresponding to the 16 bits in each control register. In 3-wire mode, every rising edge of SCLK clocks in one data bit from the SDA pin. The data is nd latched on the 32 falling edge of SCLK after 32 bits of data have been clocked into the device. In Write operations (R/W=0), all SDA bits are driven by the controlling device. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 100 WM8945 Production Data In Read operations (R/W=1), the SDA pin is driven by the controlling device to clock in the register address, after which the WM8945 drives the SDA pin to output the applicable data bits. Similarly to 2-wire control mode, the WM8945 can be set to transmit a logic 1 by tri-stating the SDA pin, rather than pulling it high (SPI_OD = 1). An external pull-up resistor is required to pull the SDA line high so that the logic 1 can be recognised by the master. The 3-wire control mode timing is illustrated in Figure 45. Figure 45 3-Wire Serial Control Interface 4-WIRE (SPI) CONTROL MODE The 4-wire control interface uses the CS ¯¯ , SCLK, SDA and SDOUT pins. The Data Output pin, SDOUT, can be configured as CMOS or Open Drain, as described in Table 66. In CMOS mode, SDOUT is driven low when not outputting register data bits. In Open Drain mode, SDOUT is undriven (high impedance) when not outputting register data bits. In Write operations (R/W=0), this mode is the same as 3-wire mode described above. In Read operations (R/W=1), the SDATA pin is ignored following receipt of the valid register address. SDOUT is driven by the WM8945. The 4-wire control mode timing is illustrated in Figure 46 and Figure 47. Figure 46 4-Wire Readback (CMOS) w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 101 WM8945 Production Data Figure 47 4-Wire Readback (Open Drain) POWER MANAGEMENT The WM8945 has two control registers that allow users to select which functions are active. For minimum power consumption, unused functions should be disabled. To ٛ minimise pop or click noise, it is important to enable or disable these functions in the correct order, and to use the signal mute registers as part of a carefully structured control sequence. Refer to the “Recommended Power Up/Down Sequence” section for more details. The power management control registers are described in Table 68. REGISTER ADDRESS R2 (02h) Power management 1 BIT 12 LABEL INPPGAL_ENA DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION Left Input PGA Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 10 ADCL_ENA 0 Left ADC and Record filter Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled ADCL_ENA must be set to 1 when processing left channel data from the ADC or Digital Microphone. 4 MICB_ENA 0 Microphone Bias Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3 BIAS_ENA 0 Master Bias Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled R3 (03h) Power management 2 14 OUTL_ENA 0 LINEOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 13 SPKR_PGA_ 0 ENA Speaker Right PGA enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 12 SPKL_PGA_ 0 ENA Speaker Left PGA enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 11 SPKR_SPKVDD _ENA 0 SPKOUTR enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTR is also controlled by SPKR_OP_ENA. When powering down SPKOUTR, the SPKR_SPKVDD_ENA bit should be reset first. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 102 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS BIT LABEL DEFAULT 10 SPKL_SPKVDD _ENA 0 DESCRIPTION SPKOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTL is also controlled by SPKL_OP_ENA. When powering down SPKOUTL, the SPKL_SPKVDD_ENA bit should be reset first 7 SPKR_OP_ENA 0 SPKOUTR enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTR is also controlled by SPKR_SPKVDD_ENA. When powering up SPKOUTR, the SPKR_OP_ENA bit should be enabled first. 6 SPKL_OP_ENA 0 SPKOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTL is also controlled by SPKL_SPKVDD_ENA. When powering up SPKOUTL, the SPKL_OP_ENA bit should be enabled first 3 SPKR_MIX_ 0 ENA Right speaker output mixer enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 SPKL_MIX_ENA 0 Left speaker output mixer enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 DACR_ENA 0 Right DAC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled DACR_ENA must be set to 1 when processing right channel data from the DAC or Digital Beep Generator. 0 DACL_ENA 0 Left DAC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled DACR_ENA must be set to 1 when processing left channel data from the DAC or Digital Beep Generator. Table 68 Power Management Control THERMAL SHUTDOWN The WM8945 incorporates a temperature sensor which detects when the device temperature is within normal limits. The temperature status can be read at any time from the TEMP_STS bit, as described in Table 69. This bit can be polled at any time, or may output directly on a GPIO pin, or may be used to generate Interrupt events. The temperature sensor can be configured to shut down the speaker outputs in the event of an overtemperature condition. This is configured using the THERR_ACT register field. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 103 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER ADDRESS R17 (11h) BIT 15 LABEL TEMP_STS DEFAULT 0 DESCRIPTION Thermal Sensor status 0 = Normal Status Flags 1 = Overtemperature R42 (2Ah) 15 THERR_ACT 1 Output ctrl Thermal Shutdown enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled When THERR_ACT = 1, then an overtemperature condition will cause the speaker outputs to be disabled. Table 69 Thermal Shutdown Control POWER ON RESET The WM8945 includes a Power-On Reset (POR) circuit, which is used to reset the digital logic into a default state after power up. The POR circuit derives its output from LDOVDD and DCVDD. The internal POR ¯¯¯ signal is asserted low when either LDOVDD or DCVDD are below minimum thresholds. The specific behaviour of the circuit will vary, depending on relative timing of the supply voltages. Typical scenarios are illustrated in Figure 48 and Figure 49. Figure 48 Power On Reset Timing – LDOVDD enabled first w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 104 WM8945 Production Data Figure 49 Power-On Reset Timing – DCVDD enabled first The POR ¯¯¯ signal is undefined until LDOVDD has exceeded the minimum threshold, Vpora Once this threshold has been exceeded, POR ¯¯¯ is asserted low and the chip is held in reset. In this condition, all writes to the control interface are ignored. Once LDOVDD and DCVDD have both reached their respective power on thresholds, POR ¯¯¯ is released high, all registers are in their default state, and writes to the control interface may take place. Note that a minimum power-on reset period, TPOR, applies even if LDOVDD and DCVDD have zero rise time. (This specification is guaranteed by design rather than test.) On power down, POR ¯¯¯ is asserted low when LDOVDD or DCVDD falls below their respective powerdown thresholds. Typical Power-On Reset parameters for the WM8945 are defined in Table 70. SYMBOL DESCRIPTION MIN TYP MAX UNIT Power-On undefined threshold (LDOVDD) 0.5 V Vpora_on Power-On threshold (LDOVDD) 1.15 V Vpora_off Power-Off threshold (LDOVDD) 1.12 V Vpord_on Power-On threshold (DCVDD) 0.57 V Vpord_off Power-Off threshold (DCVDD) 0.56 V Minimum Power-On Reset period 10.6 s Vpora TPOR Table 70 Typical Power-On Reset Parameters Separate Power-On Reset circuits are also implemented on the DBVDD and SPKVDD domains. These circuits ensure correct device behaviour whenever these supplies are enabled or disabled. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 105 WM8945 Production Data RECOMMENDED POWER UP/DOWN SEQUENCE In order to minimise output pop and click noise, it is recommended that the WM8945 device is powered up and down using one of the following sequences: Power Up: ACTION LABEL REGISTER [BITS] Turn on external supplies and wait for the supply voltages to settle. Reset registers to default state (software reset) Enable speaker and line discharge bits Enable VMID to speaker and line outputs Enable VMID Fast Start and Start up Bias Select Start-Up Bias and set VMID soft start for start-up ramp If using VMID as the reference voltage for the LDO then select VMID fast start or set to 0 if using the Bandgap as the reference voltage for LDO. Select LDO Start-Up Bias and enable LDO SW_RESET R0 (00h) [15:0] SPKR_DISCH = 1 R42 (2Ah) [7] SPKL_DISCH = 1 LINEL_DISCH = 1 R42 (2Ah) [6] R42 (2Ah) [4] SPKR_VMID_OP_ENA = 1 R42 (2Ah) [13] SPKL_VMID_OP_ENA = 1 LINEL_VMID_OP_ENA = 1 R42 (2Ah) [12] R42 (2Ah) [10] VMID_FAST_START = 1 R7 (07h) [11] STARTUP_BIAS_ENA = 1 R7 (07h) [8] BIAS_SRC = 1 R7 (07h) [7] VMID_RAMP[1:0] = 01 R7 (07h) [6:5] LDO_REF_SEL_FAST = 1 LDO_BIAS_SRC = 1 R53 (35h) [14] R53 (35h) [5] LDO_ENA = 1 R53 (35h) [15] BIAS_ENA = 1 VMID_BUF_ENA = 1 R2 (02h) [3] R2 (02h) [2] VMID_SEL[1:0] = 11 R2 (02h) [1:0] SPKP_DISCH = 0 R42 (2Ah) [6] SPKN_DISCH = 0 LINEL_DISCH = 0 R42 (2Ah) [7] R42 (2Ah) [4] SPKR_MIX_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [3] SPKL_MIX_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [2] DACR_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [1] DACL_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [0] OUTR_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [15] OUTL_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [14] SPKR_PGA_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [13] SPKL_PGA_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [12] SPKN_OP_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [7] SPKP_OP_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [6] SPKR_SPKVDD_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [11] SPKL_ SPKVDD _ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [10] VMID_ENA = 1 R7 (07h) [4] LDO_REF_SEL_FAST = 0 R53 (35h) [14] LDO_BIAS_SRC = 0 R53 (35h) [5] VMID_FAST_START = 0 R7 (07h) [11] STARTUP_BIAS_ENA = 0 R7 (07h) [8] VMID_SEL = 01 R2 (02h) [1:0] Delay 300ms for LDO to settle Enable VMID Buffer and Master Bias Set VMID_SEL[1:0] for fast start-up Disable speaker and line discharge bits Enable speaker mixer and DAC Enable speaker outputs and speaker PGA and lineout output as required Enable power to speaker drive Enable VMID Delay 150ms to allow VMID to settle Set LDO for normal operation Set VMID for normal operation Set VMID divider for normal operation w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 106 WM8945 Production Data Power Down: ACTION LABEL REGISTER[BITS] SPKR_PGA_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [13] SPKL_PGA_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [12] SPKR_VOL = 00h R47 (2Fh) [5:0] SPKL_VOL = 00h R48 (30h) [5:0] DACR_MUTE = 1 R24 (18h) [8] DACL_MUTE = 1 R23 (17h) [8] DACR_VOL = 0 R24 (18h) [7:0] DACL_VOL = 0 R23 (17h) [7:0] LDO_REF_SEL_FAST = 1 R53 (35h) [14] LDO_BIAS_SRC = 1 R53 (35h) [5] VMID_SEL = 11 R2 (02h) [1:0] VMID_FAST_START =1 R7 (07h) [11] BIAS_SRC = 1 R7 (07h) [7] VMID_RAMP = 01 R7 (07h) [6:5] VMID_ENA = 0 R7 (07h) [4] SPKR_DISCH = 1 SPKL_DISCH = 1 LINEL_DISCH = 1 R42 (2Ah) [7] R42 (2Ah) [6] R42 (2Ah) [4] Mute outputs LINEL_MUTE = 1 SPKR_OP_MUTE = 1 SPKL_OP_MUTE = 1 R42 (2Ah) [8] R03 (03h) [9] R03 (03h) [8] Disable power to speaker driver (must be done before disabling the speaker outputs) SPKR_SPKVDD_ENA = 1 SPKL_SPKVDD_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [11] R3 (03h) [10] Disable speaker outputs SPKR_OP_ENA = 1 SPKL_OP_ENA = 1 R3 (03h) [7] R3 (03h) [6] Reset SW_RESET R0 (00h) [15:0] Mute speaker PGA and DAC Select LDO for fast start-up Select VMID for fast start-up Disabled VMID Delay 500ms for VMID to discharge Discharge outputs Delay 50ms for outputs to discharge Turn off external power supply voltages SOFTWARE RESET AND DEVICE ID The WM8945 can be reset by writing to Register R0. This is a read-only register, and the contents of R0 will not be affected by writing to this Register. The Device ID can be read back from Register R0. The Chip Revision ID can be read back from Register 1, as described in Table 71. REGISTER ADDRESS BIT LABEL R0 (00h) 15:0 SW_RESET [15:0] Software Reset/Chip ID 1 R1 (01h) DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 6229h Writing to this register resets all registers to their default state. Reading from this register will indicate device family ID 6229h. 3:0 CHIP_REV [3:0] Revision Number Reading from this register will indicate the Revision ID. Table 71 Chip Reset and ID w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 107 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER MAP REG NAME 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 R0 (0h) Software Reset/Chip ID 1 R1 (1h) Chip ID 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R2 (2h) Power management 1 0 0 0 INPPG AL_EN A 0 ADCL_ ENA 0 0 DMIC_ ENA 0 0 R3 (3h) Power management 2 0 R4 (4h) Audio Interface R5 (5h) Companding control R6 (6h) Clock Gen control R7 (7h) Additional control 0 0 0 R8 (8h) FLL Control 1 0 0 0 R9 (9h) FLL Control 2 R10 (Ah) FLL Control 3 0 R11 (Bh) GPIO Config 0 R12 (Ch) GPIO1 Control R13 (Dh) 4 3 2 1 0 SW_RESET[15:0] 6229h 0 CHIP_REV[3:0] 0000h MICB_ BIAS_ VMID_ VMID_SEL[1:0] ENA ENA BUF_E NA 0000h OUTL_ SPKR_ SPKL_ SPKR_ SPKL_ SPKR_ SPKL_ SPKR_ SPKL_ SPKR_ SPKL_ SPKR_ SPKL_ DACR DACL_ ENA PGA_ PGA_ SPKV SPKV OP_M OP_M OP_E OP_E MIX_M MIX_M MIX_E MIX_E _ENA ENA ENA ENA DD_E DD_E UTE UTE NA NA UTE UTE NA NA NA NA 0330h DACDATA_PU FRAME_PULL[ BCLK_PULL[1: ADCR ADCL_ LL[1:0] 1:0] 0] _SRC SRC 0 DEFAULT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 OSC_ MCLK_PULL[1: CLKO CLKOUT_DIV[1 SYSCL SYSCL CLK_E 0] UT_SE :0] K_ENA K_SR NA L C 0 1 0 DACL_ BCLK_ LRCLK SRC INV _INV 0 LOOP BACK FMT[1:0] DAC_ DAC_ ADC_ ADC_ COMP COMP COMP COMP MODE MODE TOCL K_ENA BCLK_DIV[2:0] VMID_ VMID_ VMID_ START BIAS_ VMID_RAMP[1: VMID_ FAST_ REF_S CTRL UP_BI SRC 0] ENA START EL AS_EN A SR[3:0] FLL_CLK_REF _DIV[1:0] FLL_OUTDIV[2:0] SYSCLK_DIV[2:0] 0 WL[1:0] FLL_CTRL_RATE[2:0] FLL_FRATIO[2:0] MSTR 0 0 0000h 0106h 000Dh FLL_F FLL_E RAC NA FLL_K[15:0] 0102h 3127h FLL_N[9:0] 0 028Ah 0 FLL_GAIN[3:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GP1_D GP1_PULL[1:0] GP1_I IR NT_M ODE 0 GP1_P OL 0 0 0 0 GP1_L VL 0 GP1_FN[3:0] 8000h GPIO2 Control GP2_D GP2_PULL[1:0] GP2_I IR NT_M ODE 0 GP2_P OL 0 0 0 0 GP2_L VL 0 GP2_FN[3:0] 8000h R14 (Eh) GPIO3 Control GP3_D GP3_PULL[1:0] GP3_I IR NT_M ODE 0 GP3_P OL 0 0 0 0 GP3_L VL 0 GP3_FN[3:0] C000h R15 (Fh) GPIO4 Control GP4_D GP4_PULL[1:0] GP4_I IR NT_M ODE 0 GP4_P OL 0 0 0 0 GP4_L VL 0 GP4_FN[3:0] 8000h R16 (10h) System Interrupts TEMP GP4_I GP3_I GP2_I GP1_I TCHD TCHP AUXA _INT NT NT NT NT ATA_I D_INT DC_IN NT T 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LDO_ UV_IN T 0000h R17 (11h) Status Flags TEMP _STS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LDO_ UV_ST S 0000h R18 (12h) IRQ Config 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IM_IR Q 0001h R19 (13h) System Interrupts Mask 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 IM_LD O_UV_ INT 0000h R20 (14h) Control Interface 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPI_O SPI_4 AUTO D WIRE _INC 0002h R21 (15h) DAC Control 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DAC_ MUTE ALL 0 0 0 DAC_ AUTO MUTE 0 0 0 DACL_ DATIN V 0110h R22 (16h) DAC Control 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DAC_ VOL_R 0 0 0 DAC_ SB_FL 0010h IM_TE IM_GP IM_GP IM_GP IM_GP IM_TC IM_TC IM_AU MP_IN 4_INT 3_INT 2_INT 1_INT HDAT HPD_I XADC T A_INT NT _INT w 0 0 0 0104h MODE _GPIO 0000h PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 108 WM8945 Production Data REG NAME 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 AMP R23 (17h) Left DAC digital Vol 0 0 0 DAC_ VU 0 0 0 DACL_ MUTE R25 (19h) ADC Control 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ADC_ MUTE ALL 0 0 0 0 0 R26 (1Ah) ADC Control 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R27 (1Bh) Left ADC Digital Vol 0 0 0 ADC_ VU 0 0 0 ADCL_ MUTE R29 (1Dh) DRC Control 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DRC_ DRC_ NG_E ENA NA R30 (1Eh) DRC Control 2 0 0 0 R31 (1Fh) DRC Control 3 0 0 0 R32 (20h) DRC Control 4 0 0 0 DRC_KNEE2_IP[4:0] R33 (21h) DRC Control 5 0 0 DRC_ KNEE2 _OP_E NA DRC_KNEE2_OP[4:0] R34 (22h) DRC Control 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 R35 (23h) DRC Control 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 R36 (24h) DRC Status R37 (25h) Beep Control 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R38 (26h) Video Buffer 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R39 (27h) Input ctrl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AUX2_ AUX1_ MICB_ AUDIO AUDIO LVL R40 (28h) Left INP PGA gain ctrl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PGA_ PGAL_ PGAL_ VU ZC MUTE THER R_ACT 0 0 LINEL _VMID _OP_E NA 1 LINEL SPKR_ SPKL_ _MUT DISCH DISCH E R43 (2Bh) SPK mixer control1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R44 (2Ch) SPK mixer control2 0 0 0 0 0 0 R45 (2Dh) SPK mixer control3 0 0 0 0 0 R46 (2Eh) SPK mixer control4 0 0 0 0 R42 (2Ah) Output ctrl DRC_NG_MINGAIN[3:0] 0 0 0 1 0 0 DACL_VOL[7:0] 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 ADCL_ DATIN V 0100h ADC_HPF_CU ADC_ T[1:0] HPF 0000h 00C0h DRC_ DRC_ QR ANTIC LIP DRC_MINGAIN[2:0] DRC_ATK[3:0] DRC_DCY[3:0] 0 DRC_KNEE_OP[4:0] 0 0 1 DRC_MAXGAI N[1:0] DRC_KNEE_IP[5:0] 0 0 DRC_HI_COMP[2:0] DRC_QR_THR[ DRC_QR_DCY 1:0] [1:0] DRC_NG_EXP[ DRC_LO_COMP[2:0] 1:0] 000Fh 0C25h 0342h 0 DRC_INIT[4:0] 0000h 0003h 0000h 0000h DRC_GAIN[15:0] SPKR_ SPKL_ VMID_ VMID_ OP_E OP_E NA NA DEFAULT 00C0h ADCL_VOL[7:0] 1 0 0 T 0000h 0 BEEP_GAIN[3:0] VB_EN VB_Q VB_G A BOOS AIN T 1 BEEP_RATE[1: BEEP_ 0] ENA VB_DISOFF[2:0] MICLN _TO_N _PGAL 0 1 VB_PD VB_CL AMP 001Ch P_PGAL_SEL[ 1:0] 0035h PGAL_VOL[5:0] 0 0002h 0050h LINEL _DISC H 0 0 SPK_V LINE_ ROI VROI 8300h AUX1_ PGAL_ BYPL_ MDAC TO_SP TO_SP TO_P L_TO_ KL KL GAL PGAL 0 DACL_ TO_P GAL 0 AUX2_ AUX1_ TO_P TO_P GAL GAL 0000h 0 AUX1_ PGAR TO_SP _TO_S KR PKR 0 0 AUX1_ TO_SP KL_AT TEN 0 0 0 AUX1_ TO_SP KR_AT TEN 0 MDAC L_TO_ PGAR 0 DACL_ TO_P GAR 0 AUX2_ AUX1_ TO_P TO_P GAR GAR 0000h PGAL_ TO_SP KL_AT TEN BYPL_ TO_P GAL_A TTEN 0 0 DACL_ TO_P GAL_A TTEN 0 AUX2_ TO_P GAL_A TTEN AUX1_ TO_P GAL_A TTEN 0000h PGAR _TO_S PKR_A TTEN 0 0 0 DACL_ TO_P GAR_ ATTEN 0 AUX2_ TO_P GAR_ ATTEN AUX1_ TO_P GAR_ ATTEN 0000h R47 (2Fh) Left SPK volume ctrl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPK_V SPKL_ SPKL_ U ZC PGA_ MUTE SPKL_VOL[5:0] 0079h R48 (30h) Right SPK volume ctrl 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SPK_V SPKR_ SPKR_ U ZC PGA_ MUTE SPKR_VOL[5:0] 0079h w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 109 WM8945 REG Production Data NAME 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 4 3 2 R49 (31h) Line L mixer control 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BYPL_ MDAC TO_O L_TO_ UTL OUTL 0 DACL_ TO_O UTL 0 AUX2_ AUX1_ TO_O TO_O UTL UTL 0000h R51 (33h) Line L mixer control 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BYPL_ TO_O UTL_A TTEN 0 0 DACL_ TO_O UTL_A TTEN 0 AUX2_ TO_O UTL_A TTEN 0000h R53 (35h) LDO LDO_E LDO_ LDO_ LDO_ NA REF_S REF_S OPFLT EL_FA EL ST 0 0 0 0 0 0 LDO_B IAS_S RC LDO_VSEL[4:0] 0007h R54 (36h) Bandgap BG_E NA 0 0 0 0 0 0 BG_VSEL[4:0] 000Ah R55 (37h) Touch Control 1 TCH_E TCH_ NA CVT_E NA TCH_DELAY[2:0] TCH_RATE[4:0] 0000h R56 (38h) Touch Control 2 R57 (39h) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 TCH_P DONL Y TCH_Z TCH_Y TCH_X _ENA _ENA _ENA TCH_I SEL 0 0 0 0 AUX1_ TO_O UTL_A TTEN TCH_RPU[3:0] DEFAULT 0 0 Touch Data X TCH_P D1 0 0 0 TCH_X[11:0] 0000h R58 (3Ah) Touch Data Y TCH_P D2 0 0 0 TCH_Y[11:0] 0000h R59 (3Bh) Touch Data Z TCH_P D3 0 0 0 TCH_Z[11:0] 0000h R60 (3Ch) AuxADC Data 0 0 AUX_DATA[11:0] 0000h AUX_DATA_S RC[1:0] 0 1 0 AUX_E AUX_ NA CVT_E NA 0 5 0 R61 (3Dh) AuxADC Control 0 6 0007h 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 AUX_RATE[4:0] 0000h 0 AUX_B ATT_S EL 0 0 0 0 0 0 AUX_A AUX_A UX2_S UX1_S EL EL 0000h AUX_A AUX_B UX1_F ATT_S ILTB CALE 0 0 0 0 0 0 AUX_A AUX_A UX2_R UX1_R EF EF 0100h R62 (3Eh) AuxADC Source 0 0 0 0 0 0 R63 (3Fh) AuxADC Config 0 0 0 0 0 0 R64 (40h) SE Config Selection 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R65 (41h) SE1_LHPF_CONFIG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE1_L HPF_L _SIGN 0 0 0 SE1_L HPF_L _ENA 0000h R66 (42h) SE1_LHPF_L R71 (47h) SE1_NOTCH_CONFI G 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE1_N OTCH _L_EN A 0000h R72 (48h) SE1_NOTCH_A10 SE1_NOTCH_A10[15:0] 0000h R73 (49h) SE1_NOTCH_A11 SE1_NOTCH_A11[15:0] 0000h R74 (4Ah) SE1_NOTCH_A20 SE1_NOTCH_A20[15:0] 0000h R75 (4Bh) SE1_NOTCH_A21 SE1_NOTCH_A21[15:0] 0000h R76 (4Ch) SE1_NOTCH_A30 SE1_NOTCH_A30[15:0] 0000h R77 (4Dh) SE1_NOTCH_A31 SE1_NOTCH_A31[15:0] 0000h R78 (4Eh) SE1_NOTCH_A40 SE1_NOTCH_A40[15:0] 0000h R79 (4Fh) SE1_NOTCH_A41 SE1_NOTCH_A41[15:0] 0000h R80 (50h) SE1_NOTCH_A50 SE1_NOTCH_A50[15:0] 0000h R81 (51h) SE1_NOTCH_A51 SE1_NOTCH_A51[15:0] 0000h R82 (52h) SE1_NOTCH_M10 SE1_NOTCH_M10[15:0] 0000h R83 (53h) SE1_NOTCH_M11 SE1_NOTCH_M11[15:0] 1000h R84 (54h) SE1_NOTCH_M20 SE1_NOTCH_M20[15:0] 0000h w SE_CONFIG[3:0] 0000h SE1_LHPF_L[15:0] 0 0 0000h PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 110 WM8945 Production Data REG NAME 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DEFAULT R85 (55h) SE1_NOTCH_M21 SE1_NOTCH_M21[15:0] 1000h R86 (56h) SE1_NOTCH_M30 SE1_NOTCH_M30[15:0] 0000h R87 (57h) SE1_NOTCH_M31 SE1_NOTCH_M31[15:0] 1000h R88 (58h) SE1_NOTCH_M40 SE1_NOTCH_M40[15:0] 0000h R89 (59h) SE1_NOTCH_M41 SE1_NOTCH_M41[15:0] 1000h R90 (5Ah) SE1_NOTCH_M50 SE1_NOTCH_M50[15:0] 0000h R91 (5Bh) SE1_NOTCH_M51 SE1_NOTCH_M51[15:0] 1000h R92 (5Ch) SE1_DF1_CONFIG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE1_D F1_L_ ENA 0000h R93 (5Dh) SE1_DF1_L0 SE1_DF1_L0[15:0] 1000h R94 (5Eh) SE1_DF1_L1 SE1_DF1_L1[15:0] 0000h R95 (5Fh) SE1_DF1_L2 R99 (63h) Reserved 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000h R100 (64h) SE2_RETUNE_CON FIG 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE2_R ETUN E_L_E NA 0000h SE1_DF1_L2[15:0] 0000h R101 (65h) SE2_RETUNE_C0 SE2_RETUNE_C0[15:0] 1000h R102 (66h) SE2_RETUNE_C1 SE2_RETUNE_C1[15:0] 0000h R103 (67h) SE2_RETUNE_C2 SE2_RETUNE_C2[15:0] 0000h R104 (68h) SE2_RETUNE_C3 SE2_RETUNE_C3[15:0] 0000h R105 (69h) SE2_RETUNE_C4 SE2_RETUNE_C4[15:0] 0000h R106 (6Ah) SE2_RETUNE_C5 SE2_RETUNE_C5[15:0] 0000h R107 (6Bh) SE2_RETUNE_C6 SE2_RETUNE_C6[15:0] 0000h R108 (6Ch) SE2_RETUNE_C7 SE2_RETUNE_C7[15:0] 0000h R109 (6Dh) SE2_RETUNE_C8 SE2_RETUNE_C8[15:0] 0000h R110 (6Eh) SE2_RETUNE_C9 SE2_RETUNE_C9[15:0] 0000h R111 (6Fh) SE2_RETUNE_C10 SE2_RETUNE_C10[15:0] 0000h R112 (70h) SE2_RETUNE_C11 SE2_RETUNE_C11[15:0] 0000h R113 (71h) SE2_RETUNE_C12 SE2_RETUNE_C12[15:0] 0000h R114 (72h) SE2_RETUNE_C13 SE2_RETUNE_C13[15:0] 0000h R115 (73h) SE2_RETUNE_C14 SE2_RETUNE_C14[15:0] 0000h R116 (74h) SE2_RETUNE_C15 SE2_RETUNE_C15[15:0] 0000h R117 (75h) SE2_RETUNE_C16 SE2_RETUNE_C16[15:0] 0000h R118 (76h) SE2_RETUNE_C17 SE2_RETUNE_C17[15:0] 0000h R119 (77h) SE2_RETUNE_C18 SE2_RETUNE_C18[15:0] 0000h R120 (78h) SE2_RETUNE_C19 SE2_RETUNE_C19[15:0] 0000h R121 (79h) SE2_RETUNE_C20 SE2_RETUNE_C20[15:0] 0000h R122 (7Ah) SE2_RETUNE_C21 SE2_RETUNE_C21[15:0] 0000h R123 (7Bh) SE2_RETUNE_C22 SE2_RETUNE_C22[15:0] 0000h R124 (7Ch) SE2_RETUNE_C23 SE2_RETUNE_C23[15:0] 0000h R125 (7Dh) SE2_RETUNE_C24 SE2_RETUNE_C24[15:0] 0000h R126 (7Eh) SE2_RETUNE_C25 SE2_RETUNE_C25[15:0] 0000h R127 (7Fh) SE2_RETUNE_C26 SE2_RETUNE_C26[15:0] 0000h R128 (80h) SE2_RETUNE_C27 SE2_RETUNE_C27[15:0] 0000h R129 (81h) SE2_RETUNE_C28 SE2_RETUNE_C28[15:0] 0000h R130 (82h) SE2_RETUNE_C29 SE2_RETUNE_C29[15:0] 0000h R131 (83h) SE2_RETUNE_C30 SE2_RETUNE_C30[15:0] 0000h R132 (84h) SE2_RETUNE_C31 SE2_RETUNE_C31[15:0] 0000h R133 (85h) SE2_5BEQ_CONFIG 0 0 0 R134 (86h) SE2_5BEQ_L10G 0 0 0 w 0 0 0 0 SE2_5BEQ_L1G[4:0] 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SE2_5BEQ_L0G[4:0] SE2_5 BEQ_L _ENA 0000h 0C0Ch PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 111 WM8945 REG Production Data 15 14 13 R135 (87h) SE2_5BEQ_L32G NAME 0 0 0 R136 (88h) SE2_5BEQ_L4G 0 0 0 12 11 10 9 8 SE2_5BEQ_L3G[4:0] 0 0 0 0 0 7 6 5 0 0 0 4 SE2_5BEQ_L2G[4:0] 3 2 1 0 DEFAULT 0C0Ch 0 0 0 SE2_5BEQ_L4G[4:0] 000Ch R137 (89h) SE2_5BEQ_L0P SE2_5BEQ_L0P[15:0] 00D8h R138 (8Ah) SE2_5BEQ_L0A SE2_5BEQ_L0A[15:0] 0FCAh R139 (8Bh) SE2_5BEQ_L0B SE2_5BEQ_L0B[15:0] 0400h R140 (8Ch) SE2_5BEQ_L1P SE2_5BEQ_L1P[15:0] 01C5h R141 (8Dh) SE2_5BEQ_L1A SE2_5BEQ_L1A[15:0] 1EB5h R142 (8Eh) SE2_5BEQ_L1B SE2_5BEQ_L1B[15:0] F145h R143 (8Fh) SE2_5BEQ_L1C SE2_5BEQ_L1C[15:0] 0B75h R144 (90h) SE2_5BEQ_L2P SE2_5BEQ_L2P[15:0] 0558h R145 (91h) SE2_5BEQ_L2A SE2_5BEQ_L2A[15:0] 1C58h R146 (92h) SE2_5BEQ_L2B SE2_5BEQ_L2B[15:0] F373h R147 (93h) SE2_5BEQ_L2C SE2_5BEQ_L2C[15:0] 0A54h R148 (94h) SE2_5BEQ_L3P SE2_5BEQ_L3P[15:0] 1103h R149 (95h) SE2_5BEQ_L3A SE2_5BEQ_L3A[15:0] 168Eh R150 (96h) SE2_5BEQ_L3B SE2_5BEQ_L3B[15:0] F829h R151 (97h) SE2_5BEQ_L3C SE2_5BEQ_L3C[15:0] 07Adh R152 (98h) SE2_5BEQ_L4P SE2_5BEQ_L4P[15:0] 4000h R153 (99h) SE2_5BEQ_L4A SE2_5BEQ_L4A[15:0] 0564h R154 (9Ah) SE2_5BEQ_L4B SE2_5BEQ_L4B[15:0] 0559h w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 112 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BITS BY ADDRESS The complete register map is shown below. The detailed description can be found in the relevant text of the device description. REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R0 (00h) Software Reset/Chip ID 1 15:0 SW_RESET[15 0110_0010 Writing to this register resets all registers to their default :0] _0010_100 state. 1 Reading from this register will indicate device family ID 6229h. Register 00h Software Reset/Chip ID 1 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO 3:0 CHIP_REV[3:0] 0000 Reading from this register will indicate the Revision ID. BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION 12 INPPGAL_ENA 0 ADDRESS R1 (01h) Chip ID 2 Register 01h Chip ID 2 REGISTER REFER TO ADDRESS R2 (02h) Power managemen t1 Left Input PGA Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 10 ADCL_ENA 0 Left ADC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled ADCL_ENA must be set to 1 when processing left channel data from the ADC or Digital Microphone. 7 DMIC_ENA 0 Enables Digital Microphone mode 0 = Audio DSP input is from ADC 1 = Audio DSP input is from digital microphone interface When DMIC_ENA = 0, the Digital microphone clock (DMICCLK) is held low. 4 MICB_ENA 0 Microphone Bias Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3 BIAS_ENA 0 Master Bias Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 VMID_BUF_EN A 0 VMID Buffer Enable. (The buffered VMID may be applied to disabled input and output pins.) 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1:0 VMID_SEL[1:0] 00 VMID Divider Enable and Select 00 = VMID disabled (for OFF mode) 01 = 2 x 50k divider (for normal operation) 10 = 2 x 250k divider (for low power standby) 11 = 2 x 5k divider (for fast start-up) Register 02h Power management 1 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 113 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 14 OUTL_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R3 (03h) Power managemen t2 LINEOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 13 SPKR_PGA_E NA 0 SPKL_PGA_E NA 0 SPKR_SPKVD D_ENA 0 Speaker Right PGA enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 12 Speaker Left PGA enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 11 SPKOUTR enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTR is also controlled by SPKR_OP_ENA. When powering down SPKOUTR, the SPKR_SPKVDD_ENA bit should be reset first. 10 SPKL_SPKVD D_ENA 0 SPKOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTL is also controlled by SPKL_OP_ENA. When powering down SPKOUTL, the SPKL_SPKVDD_ENA bit should be reset first 9 SPKR_OP_MU TE 1 SPKOUTR Output Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 8 SPKL_OP_MU TE 1 SPKR_OP_EN A 0 SPKOUTL Output Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 7 SPKOUTR enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTR is also controlled by SPKR_SPKVDD_ENA. When powering up SPKOUTR, the SPKR_OP_ENA bit should be enabled first. 6 SPKL_OP_EN A 0 SPKOUTL enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that SPKOUTL is also controlled by SPKL_SPKVDD_ENA. When powering up SPKOUTL, the SPKL_OP_ENA bit should be enabled first 5 SPKR_MIX_M UTE 1 SPKL_MIX_MU TE 1 SPKR_MIX_EN A 0 SPKL_MIX_EN A 0 Right Speaker PGA Mixer Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 4 Left Speaker PGA Mixer Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 3 Right speaker output mixer enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 Left speaker output mixer enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 DACR_ENA 0 Right DAC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 114 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS DACR_ENA must be set to 1 when processing right channel data from the DAC or Digital Beep Generator. 0 DACL_ENA 0 Left DAC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled DACR_ENA must be set to 1 when processing left channel data from the DAC or Digital Beep Generator. Register 03h Power management 2 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15:14 DACDATA_PU LL[1:0] 00 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R4 (04h) Audio Interface DACDAT pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 13:12 FRAME_PULL [1:0] 00 LRCLK pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 11:10 BCLK_PULL [1:0] 00 BCLK pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 9 ADCR_SRC 1 Right Digital Audio interface source 0 = Left ADC data is output on right channel 1 = No data is output on right channel 8 ADCL_SRC 0 Left Digital Audio interface source 0 = Left ADC data is output on left channel 1 = No data is output on left channel 6 DACL_SRC 0 Left DAC Data Source Select 0 = Left DAC outputs left interface data 1 = Left DAC outputs right interface data 5 BCLK_INV 0 BCLK Invert 0 = BCLK not inverted 1 = BCLK inverted 4 LRCLK_INV 0 LRCLK Polarity / DSP Mode A-B select. Right, left and I2S modes – LRCLK polarity 0 = Not Inverted 1 = Inverted DSP Mode – Mode A-B select nd 0 = MSB is available on 2 BCLK rising edge after LRCLK rising edge (mode A) st 1 = MSB is available on 1 BCLK rising edge after LRCLK rising edge (mode B) 3:2 WL[1:0] 10 Digital Audio Interface Word Length 00 = 16 bits 01 = 20 bits 10 = 24 bits w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 115 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS 11 = 32 bits Note – see “Companding” for the selection of 8-bit mode. 1:0 FMT[1:0] 10 Digital Audio Interface Format 00 = Reserved 01 = Left Justified 10 = I2S format 11 = DSP/PCM mode Register 04h Audio Interface REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 5 LOOPBACK 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R5 (05h) Companding control Digital Loopback Function 0 = No loopback 1 = Loopback enabled (ADC data output is directly input to DAC data input). 3 DAC_COMP 0 DAC Companding Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 DAC_COMPM ODE 0 ADC_COMP 0 DAC Companding Mode 0 = µ-law 1 = A-law 1 ADC Companding Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 ADC_COMPM ODE 0 ADC Companding Mode 0 = µ-law 1 = A-law Register 05h Companding control REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 OSC_CLK_EN A 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R6 (06h) Clock Gen control Oscillator Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled This needs to be set when doing AUXADC measurements, or when a timeout clock is required for PGA zero cross or GPIO input detection 14:13 MCLK_PULL [1:0] 00 MCLK pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 CLKOUT_SEL 0 CLKOUT Source Select 0 = SYSCLK 1 = FLL or MCLK (set by SYSCLK_SRC register) 11:10 CLKOUT_DIV [1:0] 00 CLKOUT Clock divider 00 = divide by 1 01 = divide by 2 10 = divide by 4 11 = divide by 8 9 SYSCLK_ENA w 0 SYSCLK Enable PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 116 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 8 SYSCLK_SRC 1 SYSCLK Source Select 0 = MCLK 1 = FLL output 7:5 SYSCLK_DIV [2:0] 000 SYSCLK Clock divider (Sets the scaling for either the MCLK or FLL clock output, depending on SYSCLK_SRC) 000 = divide by 1 001 = divide by 1.5 010 = divide by 2 011 = divide by 3 100 = divide by 4 101 = divide by 6 110 = divide by 8 111 = divide by 12 4 TOCLK_ENA 0 TOCLK Enabled (Enables timeout clock for GPIO level detection, AMU, and PGA zero cross timeout) 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3:1 BCLK_DIV[2:0] 011 BCLK Frequency (Master mode) 000 = SYSCLK 001 = SYSCLK / 2 010 = SYSCLK / 4 011 = SYSCLK / 8 100 = SYSCLK / 16 101 = SYSCLK / 32 110 = reserved 111 = reserved 0 MSTR 0 Digital Audio Interface Mode select 0 = Slave mode 1 = Master mode Register 06h Clock Gen control REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 11 VMID_FAST_S TART 0 VMID_REF_SE L 0 VMID_CTRL 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R7 (07h) Additional control VMID (fast-start) Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 10 VMID Source Select 0 = LDO supply (LDOVDD) 1 = LDO output (LDOVOUT) 9 VMID Ratio control Sets the ratio of VMID to the source selected by VMID_REF_SEL 0 = 5/11 1 = 1/2 8 STARTUP_BIA S_ENA 0 BIAS_SRC 0 Start-Up Bias Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7 w Bias Source select PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 117 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS 0 = Normal bias 1 = Start-Up bias 6:5 VMID_RAMP [1:0] 00 VMID soft start enable / slew rate control 00 = Disabled 01 = Fast soft start 10 = Normal soft start 11 = Slow soft start 4 VMID_ENA 0 VMID Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3:0 SR[3:0] 1101 Audio Sample Rate select 0011 = 8kHz 0100 = 11.025kHz 0101 = 12kHz 0111 = 16kHz 1000 = 22.05kHz 1001 = 24kHz 1011 = 32kHz 1100 = 44.1kHz 1101 = 48kHz Register 07h Additional control REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 12:11 FLL_CLK_REF _DIV[1:0] 00 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R8 (08h) FLL Control 1 FLL Clock Reference Divider 00 = MCLK / 1 01 = MCLK / 2 10 = MCLK / 4 11 = MCLK / 8 MCLK (or other input reference) must be divided down to <=13.5MHz. For lower power operation, the reference clock can be divided down further if desired. 10:8 FLL_OUTDIV [2:0] 001 FOUT clock divider 000 = 2 001 = 4 010 = 8 011 = 16 100 = 32 101 = 64 110 = 128 111 = 256 (FOUT = FVCO / FLL_OUTDIV) 7:5 FLL_CTRL_RA TE[2:0] 000 Frequency of the FLL control block 000 = FVCO / 1 (Recommended value) 001 = FVCO / 2 010 = FVCO / 3 011 = FVCO / 4 100 = FVCO / 5 101 = FVCO / 6 110 = FVCO / 7 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 118 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS 111 = FVCO / 8 Recommended that this register is not changed from default. 4:2 FLL_FRATIO [2:0] 000 FVCO clock divider 000 = 1 001 = 2 010 = 4 011 = 8 1XX = 16 000 recommended for FREF > 1MHz 100 recommended for FREF < 16kHz 011 recommended for all other cases 1 FLL_FRAC 1 Fractional enable 0 = Integer Mode 1 = Fractional Mode Integer mode offers reduced power consumption. Fractional mode offers best FLL performance, provided also that N.K is a non-integer value. 0 FLL_ENA 0 FLL Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 08h FLL Control 1 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 FLL_K[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R9 (09h) FLL Control 2 0011_0001 Fractional multiply for FREF _0010_011 (MSB = 0.5) 1 Register 09h FLL Control 2 REGISTER BIT LABEL 14:5 FLL_N[9:0] 3:0 FLL_GAIN[3:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R10 (0Ah) FLL Control 3 00_0000_1 Integer multiply for FREF 000 (LSB = 1) 0100 Gain applied to error 0000 = x 1 (Recommended value) 0001 = x 2 0010 = x 4 0011 = x 8 0100 = x 16 0101 = x 32 0110 = x 64 0111 = x 128 1000 = x 256 Recommended that this register is not changed from default. Register 0Ah FLL Control 3 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 119 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 0 MODE_GPIO 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R11 (0Bh) GPIO Config CIFMODE/GPIO3 pin configuration 0 = Pin configured as CIFMODE 1 = Pin configured as GPIO3 Note – when this bit is set to 1, it is latched and cannot be reset until Power-Off or Software Reset. Register 0Bh GPIO Config REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 GP1_DIR 1 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R12 (0Ch) GPIO1 Control GPIO1 Pin Direction 0 = Output 1 = Input 14:13 GP1_PULL[1:0] 00 GPIO1 pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 GP1_INT_MOD E 0 GPIO1 Interrupt Mode 0 = GPIO interrupt is rising edge triggered (if GP1_POL=0) or falling edge triggered (if GP1_POL =1) 1 = GPIO interrupt is triggered on rising and falling edges 10 GP1_POL 0 GPIO1 Polarity Select 0 = Non-inverted 1 = Inverted 5 GP1_LVL 0 GPIO1 level. Write to this bit to set a GPIO output. Read from this bit to read GPIO input level. When GP1_POL is set, the register contains the opposite logic level to the external pin. 3:0 GP1_FN[3:0] 0000 GPIO1 Pin Function 0000 = Logic Level Input 0001 = Edge Detection Input 0010 = CLKOUT output 0011 = Interrupt (IRQ) output 0100 = Pen Down output 0101 = Touch Panel measurement complete output 0110 = Aux ADC measurement complete output 0111 = Temperature flag output 1000 = Reserved 1001 = DMICCLK output 1010 = Logic Level output 1011 = LDO_UV output 1100 = Reserved 1101 = Reserved 1110 = Reserved 1111 = Reserved Register 0Ch GPIO1 Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 120 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 GP2_DIR 1 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R13 (0Dh) GPIO2 Control GPIO2 Pin Direction 0 = Output 1 = Input 14:13 GP2_PULL[1:0] 00 GPIO2 pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 GP2_INT_MOD E 0 GPIO2 Interrupt Mode 0 = GPIO interrupt is rising edge triggered (if GP2_POL=0) or falling edge triggered (if GP2_POL =1) 1 = GPIO interrupt is triggered on rising and falling edges 10 GP2_POL 0 GPIO2 Polarity Select 0 = Non-inverted 1 = Inverted 5 GP2_LVL 0 GPIO2 level. Write to this bit to set a GPIO output. Read from this bit to read GPIO input level. When GP2_POL is set, the register contains the opposite logic level to the external pin. 3:0 GP2_FN[3:0] 0000 GPIO2 Pin Function 0000 = Logic Level Input 0001 = Edge Detection Input 0010 = CLKOUT output 0011 = Interrupt (IRQ) output 0100 = Pen Down output 0101 = Touch Panel measurement complete output 0110 = Aux ADC measurement complete output 0111 = Temperature flag output 1000 = Reserved 1001 = DMICCLK output 1010 = Logic Level output 1011 = LDO_UV output 1100 = Reserved 1101 = Reserved 1110 = Reserved 1111 = Reserved Register 0Dh GPIO2 Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 121 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 GP3_DIR 1 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R14 (0Eh) GPIO3 Control GPIO3 Pin Direction 0 = Output 1 = Input 14:13 GP3_PULL[1:0] 10 GPIO3 pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 GP3_INT_MOD E 0 GPIO3 Interrupt Mode 0 = GPIO interrupt is rising edge triggered (if GP3_POL=0) or falling edge triggered (if GP3_POL =1) 1 = GPIO interrupt is triggered on rising and falling edges 10 GP3_POL 0 GPIO3 Polarity Select 0 = Non-inverted 1 = Inverted 5 GP3_LVL 0 GPIO3 level. Write to this bit to set a GPIO output. Read from this bit to read GPIO input level. When GP3_POL is set, the register contains the opposite logic level to the external pin. 3:0 GP3_FN[3:0] 0000 GPIO3 Pin Function 0000 = Logic Level Input 0001 = Edge Detection Input 0010 = CLKOUT output 0011 = Interrupt (IRQ) output 0100 = Pen Down output 0101 = Touch Panel measurement complete output 0110 = Aux ADC measurement complete output 0111 = Temperature flag output 1000 = Reserved 1001 = DMICCLK output 1010 = Logic Level output 1011 = LDO_UV output 1100 = Reserved 1101 = Reserved 1110 = Reserved 1111 = Reserved Register 0Eh GPIO3 Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 122 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 GP4_DIR 1 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R15 (0Fh) GPIO4 Control GPIO4 Pin Direction 0 = Output 1 = Input 14:13 GP4_PULL[1:0] 00 GPIO4 pull-up / pull-down Enable 00 = no pull-up or pull-down 01 = pull-down 10 = pull-up 11 = reserved 12 GP4_INT_MOD E 0 GPIO4 Interrupt Mode 0 = GPIO interrupt is rising edge triggered (if GP4_POL=0) or falling edge triggered (if GP4_POL =1) 1 = GPIO interrupt is triggered on rising and falling edges 10 GP4_POL 0 GPIO4 Polarity Select 0 = Non-inverted 1 = Inverted 5 GP4_LVL 0 GPIO4 level. Write to this bit to set a GPIO output. Read from this bit to read GPIO input level. When GP4_POL is set, the register contains the opposite logic level to the external pin. 3:0 GP4_FN[3:0] 0000 GPIO4 Pin Function 0000 = Logic Level Input 0001 = Edge Detection Input 0010 = CLKOUT output 0011 = Interrupt (IRQ) output 0100 = Pen Down output 0101 = Touch Panel measurement complete output 0110 = Aux ADC measurement complete output 0111 = Temperature flag output 1000 = Reserved 1001 = DMICCLK output 1010 = Logic Level output 1011 = LDO_UV output 1100 = Reserved 1101 = Reserved 1110 = Reserved 1111 = Reserved Register 0Fh GPIO4 Control w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 123 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 TEMP_INT 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R16 (10h) System Interrupts Thermal Interrupt status 0 = Thermal interrupt not set 1 = Thermal interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 14 GP4_INT 0 GPIO4 Interrupt status 0 = GPIO4 interrupt not set 1 = GPIO4 interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 13 GP3_INT 0 GPIO3 Interrupt status 0 = GPIO3 interrupt not set 1 = GPIO3 interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 12 GP2_INT 0 GPIO2 Interrupt status 0 = GPIO2 interrupt not set 1 = GPIO2 interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 11 GP1_INT 0 GPIO1 Interrupt status 0 = GPIO1 interrupt not set 1 = GPIO1 interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 10 TCHDATA_INT 0 Touch Panel Data Ready Interrupt 0 = Touch Panel Data Ready interrupt not set 1 = Touch Panel Data Ready interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 9 TCHPD_INT 0 Touch Panel pen down Interrupt 0 = Touch Panel Pen Down interrupt not set 1 = Touch Panel Pen Down interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 8 AUXADC_INT 0 AUXADC Data Ready Interrupt 0 = AUXADC Data Ready interrupt not set 1 = AUXADC Data Ready interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. 0 LDO_UV_INT 0 LDO Undervoltage Interrupt 0 = LDO Undervoltage interrupt not set 1 = LDO Undervoltage interrupt set This bit is latched when set; it is cleared when the register is Read. Register 10h System Interrupts w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 124 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 TEMP_STS 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R17 (11h) Status Flags Thermal Sensor status 0 = Normal 1 = Overtemperature 0 LDO_UV_STS 0 LDO Undervoltage status 0 = Normal 1 = Undervoltage Register 11h Status Flags REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 0 IM_IRQ 1 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R18 (12h) IRQ Config IRQ (GPIO output) Mask 0 = Normal 1 = IRQ output is masked Register 12h IRQ Config REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 IM_TEMP_INT 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R19 (13h) System Interrupts Mask Interrupt mask for thermal status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 14 IM_GP4_INT 0 Interrupt mask for GPIO4 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 13 IM_GP3_INT 0 Interrupt mask for GPIO3 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 12 IM_GP2_INT 0 Interrupt mask for GPIO2 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 11 IM_GP1_INT 0 Interrupt mask for GPIO1 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 10 IM_TCHDATA_ INT 0 IM_TCHPD_IN T 0 IM_AUXADC_I NT 0 IM_LDO_UV_I NT 0 Interrupt mask for Touch Panel Data Ready status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 9 Interrupt mask for Touch Panel Pen Down status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 8 Interrupt mask for AUXADC Data Ready status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked 0 Interrupt mask for LDO Undervoltage status 0 = Not masked 1 = Masked Register 13h System Interrupts Mask w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 125 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 2 SPI_OD 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R20 (14h) Control Interface SDOUT pin configuration (applies to 4-wire mode only) 0 = SDOUT output is CMOS 1 = SDOUT output is open drain 1 SPI_4WIRE 1 SPI control mode select 0 = 3-wire using bidirectional SDA 1 = 4-wire using SDOUT 0 AUTO_INC 0 Enables address auto-increment (applies to 2-wire / I2C mode only) 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 14h Control Interface REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 DAC_MUTEAL L 1 DAC_AUTOMU TE 1 DACL_DATINV 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R21 (15h) DAC Control 1 DAC Digital Mute for All Channels: 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute on all channels 4 DAC Auto-Mute Control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 Left DAC Invert 0 = Left DAC output not inverted 1 = Left DAC output inverted Register 15h DAC Control 1 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 4 DAC_VOL_RA MP 1 DAC_SB_FLT 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R22 (16h) DAC Control 2 DAC Volume Ramp control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 Selects DAC filter characteristics 0 = Normal mode 1 = Sloping stopband mode Register 16h DAC Control 2 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 126 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 12 DAC_VU 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R23 (17h) Left DAC digital Vol DAC Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit enables the Left DAC volume to be updated 8 DACL_MUTE 0 Left DAC Digital Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 7:0 DACL_VOL [7:0] 1100_0000 Left DAC Digital Volume 0000_0000 = mute 0000_0001 = -71.625dB 0000_0010 = -71.250dB … 1100_0000 = 0dB ... 1111_1111 = +23.625dB Register 17h Left DAC digital Vol REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 ADC_MUTEAL L 1 ADCL_DATINV 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R25 (19h) ADC Control 1 ADC Digital Mute for All Channels 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute on all channels 0 Left ADC Invert 0 = Left ADC output not inverted 1 = Left ADC output inverted Register 19h ADC Control 1 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 2:1 ADC_HPF_CU T[1:0] 00 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R26 (1Ah) ADC Control 2 High pass filter configuration. Table 11 st 00 = 1 order HPF (fc=4Hz at fs=48kHz) nd 01 = 2 order HPF (fc=122Hz at fs=48kHz) nd 10 = 2 order HPF (fc=153Hz at fs=48kHz) nd 11 = 2 order HPF (fc=196Hz at fs=48kHz) 0 ADC_HPF 0 ADC Digital High Pass Filter Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 1Ah ADC Control 2 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 127 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 12 ADC_VU 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R27 (1Bh) Left ADC Digital Vol ADC Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit enables the Left ADC volume to be updated 8 ADCL_MUTE 0 Left ADC Digital Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 7:0 ADCL_VOL [7:0] 1100_0000 Left ADC Digital Volume 0000_0000 = mute 0000_0001 = -71.625dB 0000_0010 = -71.250dB … 1100_0000 = 0dB ... 1111_1111 = +23.625dB Register 1Bh Left ADC Digital Vol REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 DRC_NG_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R29 (1Dh) DRC Control 1 DRC Noise Gate Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7 DRC_ENA 0 DRC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 2 DRC_QR 1 DRC Quick-release Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 DRC_ANTICLI P 1 DRC Anti-clip Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 1Dh DRC Control 1 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 128 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 12:9 DRC_NG_MIN GAIN[3:0] 0110 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R30 (1Eh) DRC Control 2 Minimum gain the DRC can use to attenuate audio signals when the noise gate is active. 0000 = -36dB 0001 = -30dB 0010 = -24dB 0011 = -18dB 0100 = -12dB 0101 = -6dB 0110 = 0dB 0111 = 6dB 1000 = 12dB 1001 = 18dB 1010 = 24dB 1011 = 30dB 1100 = 36dB 1101 to 1111 = Reserved 4:2 DRC_MINGAIN [2:0] 001 Minimum gain the DRC can use to attenuate audio signals 000 = 0dB 001 = -12dB (default) 010 = -18dB 011 = -24dB 100 = -36dB 101 = Reserved 11X = Reserved 1:0 DRC_MAXGAI N[1:0] 01 Maximum gain the DRC can use to boost audio signals (dB) 00 = 12dB 01 = 18dB 10 = 24dB 11 = 36dB Register 1Eh DRC Control 2 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 129 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 7:4 DRC_ATK[3:0] 0100 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R31 (1Fh) DRC Control 3 Gain attack rate (seconds/6dB) 0000 = Reserved 0001 = 181us 0010 = 363us 0011 = 726us 0100 = 1.45ms 0101 = 2.9ms 0110 = 5.8ms 0111 = 11.6ms 1000 = 23.2ms 1001 = 46.4ms 1010 = 92.8ms 1011 = 185.6ms 1100-1111 = Reserved 3:0 DRC_DCY[3:0] 0010 Gain decay rate (seconds/6dB) 0000 = 186ms 0001 = 372ms 0010 = 743ms 0011 = 1.49s 0100 = 2.97s 0101 = 5.94s 0110 = 11.89s 0111 = 23.78s 1000 = 47.56s 1001-1111 = Reserved Register 1Fh DRC Control 3 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 12:8 DRC_KNEE2_I P[4:0] 0_0000 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R32 (20h) DRC Control 4 Input signal level at the Noise Gate threshold ‘Knee2’. 00000 = -36dB 00001 = -37.5dB 00010 = -39dB … (-1.5dB steps) 11110 = -81dB 11111 = -82.5dB Only applicable when DRC_NG_ENA = 1. 7:2 DRC_KNEE_IP [5:0] 00_0000 Input signal level at the Compressor ‘Knee1’. 000000 = 0dB 000001 = -0.75dB 000010 = -1.5dB … (-0.75dB steps) 111100 = -45dB 111101 = Reserved 11111X = Reserved Register 20h DRC Control 4 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 130 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 13 DRC_KNEE2_ OP_ENA 0 DRC_KNEE2_ OP[4:0] 0_0000 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R33 (21h) DRC Control 5 DRC_KNEE2_OP Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 12:8 Output signal at the Noise Gate threshold ‘Knee2’. 00000 = -30dB 00001 = -31.5dB 00010 = -33dB … (-1.5dB steps) 11110 = -75dB 11111 = -76.5dB Only applicable when DRC_KNEE2_OP_ENA = 1. 7:3 DRC_KNEE_O P[4:0] 0_0000 Output signal at the Compressor ‘Knee1’. 00000 = 0dB 00001 = -0.75dB 00010 = -1.5dB … (-0.75dB steps) 11110 = -22.5dB 11111 = Reserved 2:0 DRC_HI_COM P[2:0] 011 Compressor slope (upper region) 000 = 1 (no compression) 001 = 1/2 010 = 1/4 011 = 1/8 100 = 1/16 101 = 0 110 = Reserved 111 = Reserved Register 21h DRC Control 5 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 3:2 DRC_QR_THR [1:0] 00 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R34 (22h) DRC Control 6 DRC Quick-release threshold (crest factor in dB) 00 = 12dB 01 = 18dB 10 = 24dB 11 = 30dB 1:0 DRC_QR_DCY [1:0] 00 DRC Quick-release decay rate (seconds/6dB) 00 = 0.725ms 01 = 1.45ms 10 = 5.8ms 11 = reserved Register 22h DRC Control 6 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 131 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 9:8 DRC_NG_EXP [1:0] 00 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R35 (23h) DRC Control 7 Noise Gate slope 00 = 1 (no expansion) 01 = 2 10 = 4 11 = 8 7:5 DRC_LO_COM P[2:0] 000 Compressor slope (lower region) 000 = 1 (no compression) 001 = 1/2 010 = 1/4 011 = 1/8 100 = 0 101 = Reserved 11X = Reserved 4:0 DRC_INIT 00000 Initial value at DRC startup 00000 = 0dB 00001 = -3.75dB … (-3.75dB steps) 11111 = -116.25dB Register 23h DRC Control 7 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 DRC_GAIN [15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R36 (24h) DRC Status 0000_0000 DRC Gain value. _0000_000 This is the DRC gain, expressed as a voltage multiplier. 0 Fixed point coding, MSB = 64. The first 7 bits are the integer portion; the remaining bits are the fractional part. Register 24h DRC Status REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 6:3 BEEP_GAIN [3:0] 0000 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R37 (25h) Beep Control 1 Digital Beep Volume Control 0000 = mute 0001 = -83dB 0010 = -77dB … (6dB steps) 1111 = +1dB 2:1 BEEP_RATE [1:0] 01 Beep Waveform Control 00 = Reserved 01 = 1kHz 10 = 2kHz 11 = 4kHz 0 BEEP_ENA 0 Digital Beep Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Note that the DAC and associated signal path needs to be enabled when using the digital beep. Register 25h Beep Control 1 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 132 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 7 VB_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R38 (26h) Video Buffer Video buffer enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 6 VB_QBOOST 0 Video buffer filter Q-Boost control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 5 VB_GAIN 0 Video buffer gain 0 = 0dB (=6dB unloaded) 1 = 6dB (=12dB unloaded) 4:2 VB_DISOFF [2:0] 111 Video buffer DC offset control 000 = Reserved 001 = 40mV offset 010 = Reserved 011 = 20mV offset 100 = Reserved 101 = Reserved 110 = Reserved 111 = 0mV offset Note – the specified offset applies to the 0dB gain setting (VB_GAIN=0). When 6dB gain is selected, the DC offset is doubled. 1 VB_PD 0 Video buffer pull-down 0 = pull-down disabled 1 = pull-down enabled 0 VB_CLAMP 0 Enable the clamp between the video input and ground 0 = no clamp 1 = Video buffer input is clamped to ground Register 26h Video Buffer REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 AUX2_AUDIO 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R39 (27h) Input ctrl AUX2 pin configuration 0 = Non-Audio signal 1 = AC-coupled Audio signal 7 AUX1_AUDIO 0 AUX1 pin configuration 0 = Non-Audio signal 1 = AC-coupled Audio signal 6 MICB_LVL 0 Microphone Bias Voltage control 0 = 0.9 x LDOVOUT 1 = 0.65 x LDOVOUT 4 MICLN_TO_N_ PGAL 1 P_PGAL_SEL [1:0] 01 Left Input PGA Inverting Input Select 0 = Connected to VMID 1 = Connected to IN2L 1:0 Left Input PGA Non-Inverting Input Select 00 = Connected to IN2L 01 = Connected to IN1L 10 = Connected to AUX1 11 = Reserved Register 27h Input ctrl w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 133 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 PGA_VU 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R40 (28h) Left INP PGA gain ctrl Input PGA Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit enables the Left PGA volume to be updated 7 PGAL_ZC 0 Left Input PGA Zero Cross Detector 0 = Change gain immediately 1 = Change gain on zero cross only 6 PGAL_MUTE 1 Left Input PGA Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 5:0 PGAL_VOL [5:0] 01_0000 Left Input PGA Volume 00_0000 = -12dB 00_0001 = -11.25dB … 01_0000 = 0dB ... 11_1111 = +35.25 Register 28h Left INP PGA gain ctrl REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 THERR_ACT 1 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R42 (2Ah) Output ctrl Thermal Shutdown enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled When THERR_ACT = 1, then an overtemperature condition will cause the speaker outputs to be disabled. 13 SPKR_VMID_ OP_ENA 0 Buffered VMID to SPKOUTR Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 12 SPKL_VMID_O P_ENA 0 Buffered VMID to SPKOUTL Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 10 LINEL_VMID_ OP_ENA 0 Buffered VMID to LINEOUTL Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 8 LINEL_MUTE 1 LINEOUTL Output Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 7 SPKR_DISCH 0 Discharges SPKOUTR output via approx 4k resistor 0 = Not active 1 = Actively discharging SPKOUTR 6 SPKL_DISCH 0 Discharges SPKOUTL output via approx 4k resistor 0 = Not active 1 = Actively discharging SPKOUTL 4 LINEL_DISCH 0 Discharges LINEOUTL output via approx 4k resistor 0 = Not active 1 = Actively discharging LINEOUTL 1 SPK_VROI 0 Buffered VREF to SPKOUTL / SPKOUTR resistance (Disabled outputs) 0 = approx 20k 1 = approx 1k 0 LINE_VROI 0 Buffered VREF to LINEOUTL resistance (Disabled output) 0 = approx 20k 1 = approx 1k Register 2Ah Output ctrl w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 134 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 AUX1_TO_SP KL 0 PGAL_TO_SP KL 0 BYPL_TO_PG AL 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R43 (2Bh) SPK mixer control1 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Speaker Output select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7 Left Speaker PGA Mixer to Left Speaker Output select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 6 Left Input PGA (ADC bypass) to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 5 MDACL_TO_P GAL 0 DACL_TO_PG AL 0 AUX2_TO_PG AL 0 AUX1_TO_PG AL 0 Inverted Left DAC to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3 Left DAC to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 AUX2 Audio Input to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 2Bh SPK mixer control1 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 AUX1_TO_SP KR 0 PGAR_TO_SP KR 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R44 (2Ch) SPK mixer control2 AUX1 Audio Input to Right Speaker Output select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7 Right Speaker PGA Mixer to Right Speaker Output select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 5 MDACL_TO_P GAR 0 DACL_TO_PG AR 0 AUX2_TO_PG AR 0 AUX1_TO_PG AR 0 Inverted Left DAC to Right Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3 Left DAC to Right Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 AUX2 Audio Input to Right Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Right Speaker PGA Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 2Ch SPK mixer control2 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 135 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 AUX1_TO_SP KL_ATTEN 0 PGAL_TO_SP KL_ATTEN 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R45 (2Dh) SPK mixer control3 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Speaker Output attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 7 Left Speaker PGA Mixer to Left Speaker Output attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 6 BYPL_TO_PG AL_ATTEN 0 Left Input PGA (ADC bypass) to Left Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 3 DACL_TO_PG AL_ATTEN 0 AUX2_TO_PG AL_ATTEN 0 Left DAC to Left Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 1 AUX2 Audio Input to Left Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 0 AUX1_TO_PG AL_ATTEN 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation Register 2Dh SPK mixer control3 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 AUX1_TO_SP KR_ATTEN 0 PGAR_TO_SP KR_ATTEN 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R46 (2Eh) SPK mixer control4 AUX1 Audio Input to Right Speaker Output attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 7 Right Speaker PGA Mixer to Right Speaker Output attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 3 DACL_TO_PG AR_ATTEN 0 AUX2_TO_PG AR_ATTEN 0 Left DAC to Right Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 1 AUX2 Audio Input to Right Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 0 AUX1_TO_PG AR_ATTEN 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Right Speaker PGA Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation Register 2Eh SPK mixer control4 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 136 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 SPK_VU 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R47 (2Fh) Left SPK volume ctrl Speaker PGA Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit will cause the Left and Right Speaker PGA volumes to be updated simultaneously. 7 SPKL_ZC 0 Left Speaker PGA Zero Cross Detector 0 = Change gain immediately 1 = Change gain on zero cross only 6 SPKL_PGA_M UTE 1 SPKL_VOL [5:0] 11_1001 Left Speaker PGA Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 5:0 Left Speaker PGA Volume 00_0000 = -57dB gain 00_0001 = -56dB … 11_1001 = 0dB ... 11_1111 = +6dB Register 2Fh Left SPK volume ctrl REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 SPK_VU 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R48 (30h) Right SPK volume ctrl Speaker PGA Volume Update Writing a 1 to this bit will cause the Left and Right Speaker PGA volumes to be updated simultaneously. 7 SPKR_ZC 0 Right Speaker PGA Zero Cross Detector 0 = Change gain immediately 1 = Change gain on zero cross only 6 SPKR_PGA_M UTE 1 SPKR_VOL [5:0] 11_1001 Right Speaker PGA Mute 0 = Disable Mute 1 = Enable Mute 5:0 Right Speaker PGA Volume 00_0000 = -57dB gain 00_0001 = -56dB … 11_1001 = 0dB ... 11_1111 = +6dB Register 30h Right SPK volume ctrl w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 137 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 6 BYPL_TO_OU TL 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R49 (31h) Line L mixer control 1 Left Input PGA (ADC bypass) to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 5 MDACL_TO_O UTL 0 DACL_TO_OU TL 0 AUX2_TO_OU TL 0 Inverted Left DAC to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 3 Left DAC to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 1 AUX2 Audio Input to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 0 AUX1_TO_OU TL 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Output Mixer select 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 31h Line L mixer control 1 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 6 BYPL_TO_OU TL_ATTEN 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R51 (33h) Line L mixer control 2 Left Input PGA (ADC bypass) to Left Output Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 3 DACL_TO_OU TL_ATTEN 0 AUX2_TO_OU TL_ATTEN 0 AUX1_TO_OU TL_ATTEN 0 Left DAC to Left Output Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 1 AUX2 Audio Input to Left Output Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation 0 AUX1 Audio Input to Left Output Mixer attenuation 0 = 0dB 1 = -6dB attenuation Register 33h Line L mixer control 2 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 138 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 LDO_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R53 (35h) LDO LDO Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 14 LDO_REF_SE L_FAST 0 LDO Voltage reference select 0 = VMID (normal) 1 = VMID (fast start) This field is only effective when LDO_REF_SEL = 0 13 LDO_REF_SE L 0 LDO_OPFLT 0 LDO Voltage reference select 0 = VMID 1 = Bandgap 12 LDO Output float 0 = Disabled (Output discharged when disabled) 1 = Enabled (Output floats when disabled) 5 LDO_BIAS_SR C 0 LDO_VSEL [4:0] 0_0111 LDO Bias Source select 0 = Master Bias 1 = Start-Up Bias 4:0 LDO Voltage select (Sets the LDO output as a ratio of the selected voltage reference. The voltage reference is set by LDO_REF_SEL.) 00111 = Vref x 1.97 (default) Register 35h LDO REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 BG_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R54 (36h) Bandgap Bandgap Reference Control 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 4:0 BG_VSEL[4:0] 0_1010 Bandgap Voltage select (Sets the Bandgap voltage) 00000 = 1.200V … 26.7mV steps 01010 = 1.467V (default) … 01111 = 1.600V 10000 to 11111 = reserved (See Table 38 for values) Register 36h Bandgap REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 TCH_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R55 (37h) Touch Control 1 Touch Panel Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 14 TCH_CVT_EN A 0 Touch Panel Conversion Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled In automatic mode, conversions are enabled by setting this bit. In manual mode (TCH_RATE = 0), setting this bit will w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 139 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 10 TCH_Z_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS initiate a set of conversion; the bit is reset automatically. Enables Z-axis touch panel measurements. 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 9 TCH_Y_ENA 0 Enables Y-axis touch panel measurements 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 8 TCH_X_ENA 0 Enables X-axis touch panel measurements 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 7:5 TCH_DELAY [2:0] 000 Settling time between X, Y and Z measurements. (Nominal timing only; typically +/-20% of quoted values.) 000 = 30us 001 = 60us 010 = 120us 011 = 240us 100 = 480us 101 = 960us 110 = 1920us 111 = 3840us 4:0 TCH_RATE [4:0] 0_0000 Touch Panel Rate 0_0000 = Manual conversion 0_0001 = 16kHz 0_0010 = 32kHz …(16kHz steps) 1_1111 = 496kHz Register 37h Touch Control 1 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 11 TCH_PDONLY 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R56 (38h) Touch Control 2 Select Automatic conversions only when Pen Down is detected. (No effect on Manual conversion.) 0 = Normal 1 = Pen-Down only 8 TCH_ISEL 0 Pressure measurement current select 0 = 230uA 1 = 460uA 3:0 TCH_RPU[3:0] 0111 Pen-Down sensitivity (pull-up resistor) 0000 = 64k (most sensitive) 0001 = 64k / 2 0010 = 64k / 3 0011 = 64k / 4 …. 1111 = 64k / 16 (least sensitive) Register 38h Touch Control 2 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 140 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 TCH_PD1 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R57 (39h) Touch Data X Pen down status (indicates if the Pen Down was detected prior to the TP measurement) 0 = Pen Down not detected 1 = Pen Down detected 11:0 TCH_X[11:0] 0000_0000 Touch panel X-axis data _0000 Register 39h Touch Data X REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 TCH_PD2 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R58 (3Ah) Touch Data Y Pen down status (indicates if the Pen Down was detected prior to the TP measurement) 0 = Pen Down not detected 1 = Pen Down detected 11:0 TCH_Y[11:0] 0000_0000 Touch panel Y-axis data _0000 Register 3Ah Touch Data Y REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 TCH_PD3 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R59 (3Bh) Touch Data Z Pen down status (indicates if the Pen Down was detected prior to the TP measurement) 0 = Pen Down not detected 1 = Pen Down detected 11:0 TCH_Z[11:0] 0000_0000 Touch panel Z-axis data _0000 Register 3Bh Touch Data Z REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 13:12 AUX_DATA_S RC[1:0] 00 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R60 (3Ch) AuxADC Data AUXADC Data Source 00 = No measurement 01 = AUX1 10 = AUX2 11 = SPKVDD 11:0 AUX_DATA [11:0] 0000_0000 AUXADC data _0000 (12 bit unsigned data) Register 3Ch AuxADC Data w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 141 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 15 AUX_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R61 (3Dh) AuxADC Control AUXADC Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled 14 AUX_CVT_EN A 0 AUXADC Conversion Enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled In automatic mode, conversions are enabled by setting this bit. In manual mode (AUX_RATE = 0), setting this bit will initiate a conversion; the bit is reset automatically. 4:0 AUX_RATE [4:0] 0_0000 AUXADC Conversion Rate 0_0000 = Manual conversion 0_0001 = 16Hz 0_0010 = 32Hz …(16Hz steps) 1_1111 = 496Hz Register 3Dh AuxADC Control REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 8 AUX_BATT_ SEL 0 AUX_AUX2_ SEL 0 AUX_AUX1_ SEL 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R62 (3Eh) AuxADC Source AUXADC Battery (SPKVDD) input select 0 = Disable Battery (SPKVDD) measurement 1 = Enable Battery (SPKVDD) measurement 1 AUXADC AUX2 input select 0 = Disable AUX2 measurement 1 = Enable AUX2 measurement 0 AUXADC AUX1 input select 0 = Disable AUX1 measurement 1 = Enable AUX1 measurement Register 3Eh AuxADC Source REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO 9 AUX_AUX1_ FILTB 0 AUXADC Battery (SPKVDD) measurement filter control ADDRESS R63 (3Fh) AuxADC Config 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled When AUX_AUX1_FILTB is set, the Battery (SPKVDD) measurement point is connected to the AUX1 pin, allowing an external capacitor to be used to filter noise. 8 AUX_BATT_ SCALE 1 AUXADC Battery (SPKVDD) measurement divider control 0 = 0.45 x SPKVDD (Note that 0.45 x 3.3V = 1.485V) 1 = 0.41 x SPKVDD (Note that 0.41 x 3.6V = 1.476V) 1 AUX_AUX2_ REF 0 AUX_AUX1_ REF 0 AUXADC AUX2 reference select 0 = LDOVDD/2 1 = 1.5V (nominal) Bandgap 0 AUXADC AUX1 reference select 0 = LDOVDD/2 1 = 1.5V (nominal) Bandgap Register 3Fh AuxADC Config w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 142 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 3:0 SE_CONFIG [3:0] 0000 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R64 (40h) SE Config Selection DSP Configuration Mode select 0000 = Record mode 0001 = Playback mode 0010 = DSP General mode 1 0011 = DSP General mode 2 Register 40h SE Config Selection REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 4 SE1_LHPF_L_ SIGN 0 SE1_LHPF_L_ ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R65 (41h) SE1_LHPF_ CONFIG SE1_LHPF_L_SIGN 0 : sum internal result (LPF) 1 : sub internal result (HPF) 0 SE1 Left channel low-pass / high-pass filter enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 41h SE1_LHPF_CONFIG REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_LHPF_L [15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R66 (42h) SE1_LHPF_ L 0000_0000_00 SE1_LHPF left channel coefficient 00_0000 Register 42h SE1_LHPF_L REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 0 SE1_NOTCH_ L_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R71 (47h) SE1_NOTC H_CONFIG SE1 Left channel notch filters enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 47h SE1_NOTCH_CONFIG REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A10[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R72 (48h) SE1_NOTC H_A10 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 48h SE1_NOTCH_A10 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A11[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R73 (49h) SE1_NOTC H_A11 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 49h SE1_NOTCH_A11 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 143 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A20[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R74 (4Ah) SE1_NOTC H_A20 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 4Ah SE1_NOTCH_A20 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A21[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R75 (4Bh) SE1_NOTC H_A21 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 4Bh SE1_NOTCH_A21 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A30[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R76 (4Ch) SE1_NOTC H_A30 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 4Ch SE1_NOTCH_A30 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A31[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R77 (4Dh) SE1_NOTC H_A31 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 4Dh SE1_NOTCH_A31 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A40[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R78 (4Eh) SE1_NOTC H_A40 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 4Eh SE1_NOTCH_A40 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A41[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R79 (4Fh) SE1_NOTC H_A41 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 4Fh SE1_NOTCH_A41 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A50[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R80 (50h) SE1_NOTC H_A50 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 50h SE1_NOTCH_A50 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 144 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ A51[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R81 (51h) SE1_NOTC H_A51 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 51h SE1_NOTCH_A51 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M10[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R82 (52h) SE1_NOTC H_M10 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 52h SE1_NOTCH_M10 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M11[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R83 (53h) SE1_NOTC H_M11 0001_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 53h SE1_NOTCH_M11 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M20[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R84 (54h) SE1_NOTC H_M20 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 54h SE1_NOTCH_M20 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M21[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R85 (55h) SE1_NOTC H_M21 0001_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 55h SE1_NOTCH_M21 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M30[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R86 (56h) SE1_NOTC H_M30 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 56h SE1_NOTCH_M30 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M31[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R87 (57h) SE1_NOTC H_M31 0001_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 57h SE1_NOTCH_M31 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 145 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M40[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R88 (58h) SE1_NOTC H_M40 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 58h SE1_NOTCH_M40 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M41[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R89 (59h) SE1_NOTC H_M41 0001_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 59h SE1_NOTCH_M41 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M50[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R90 (5Ah) SE1_NOTC H_M50 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 5Ah SE1_NOTCH_M50 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_NOTCH_ M51[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R91 (5Bh) SE1_NOTC H_M51 0001_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) notch filter 00_0000 Register 5Bh SE1_NOTCH_M51 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 0 SE1_DF1_L_E NA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R92 (5Ch) SE1_DF1_C ONFIG SE1 Left channel DF1 filter enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 5Ch SE1_DF1_CONFIG REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_DF1_L0 [15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R93 (5Dh) SE1_DF1_L 0 0001_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) left channel DF1 filter 00_0000 Register 5Dh SE1_DF1_L0 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 146 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_DF1_L1 [15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R94 (5Eh) SE1_DF1_L 1 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) left channel DF1 filter 00_0000 Register 5Eh SE1_DF1_L1 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE1_DF1_L2 [15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R95 (5Fh) SE1_DF1_L 2 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 1 (SE1) left channel DF1 filter 00_0000 Register 5Fh SE1_DF1_L2 REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 0 SE2_RETUNE _L_ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R100 (64h) SE2_RETU NE_CONFI G SE2 Left channel ReTune™ filter enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 64h SE2_RETUNE_CONFIG REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C0[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R101 (65h) SE2_RETU NE_C0 0001_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 65h SE2_RETUNE_C0 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C1[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R102 (66h) SE2_RETU NE_C1 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 66h SE2_RETUNE_C1 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C2[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R103 (67h) SE2_RETU NE_C2 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 67h SE2_RETUNE_C2 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C3[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R104 (68h) SE2_RETU NE_C3 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 68h SE2_RETUNE_C3 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 147 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C4[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R105 (69h) SE2_RETU NE_C4 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 69h SE2_RETUNE_C4 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C5[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R106 (6Ah) SE2_RETU NE_C5 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 6Ah SE2_RETUNE_C5 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C6[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R107 (6Bh) SE2_RETU NE_C6 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 6Bh SE2_RETUNE_C6 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C7[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R108 (6Ch) SE2_RETU NE_C7 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 6Ch SE2_RETUNE_C7 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C8[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R109 (6Dh) SE2_RETU NE_C8 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 6Dh SE2_RETUNE_C8 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C9[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R110 (6Eh) SE2_RETU NE_C9 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 6Eh SE2_RETUNE_C9 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C10[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R111 (6Fh) SE2_RETU NE_C10 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 6Fh SE2_RETUNE_C10 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 148 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C11[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R112 (70h) SE2_RETU NE_C11 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 70h SE2_RETUNE_C11 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C12[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R113 (71h) SE2_RETU NE_C12 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 71h SE2_RETUNE_C12 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C13[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R114 (72h) SE2_RETU NE_C13 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 72h SE2_RETUNE_C13 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C14[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R115 (73h) SE2_RETU NE_C14 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 73h SE2_RETUNE_C14 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C15[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R116 (74h) SE2_RETU NE_C15 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 74h SE2_RETUNE_C15 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C16[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R117 (75h) SE2_RETU NE_C16 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 75h SE2_RETUNE_C16 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C17[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R118 (76h) SE2_RETU NE_C17 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 76h SE2_RETUNE_C17 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 149 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C18[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R119 (77h) SE2_RETU NE_C18 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 77h SE2_RETUNE_C18 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C19[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R120 (78h) SE2_RETU NE_C19 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 78h SE2_RETUNE_C19 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C20[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R121 (79h) SE2_RETU NE_C20 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 79h SE2_RETUNE_C20 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C21[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R122 (7Ah) SE2_RETU NE_C21 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 7Ah SE2_RETUNE_C21 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C22[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R123 (7Bh) SE2_RETU NE_C22 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 7Bh SE2_RETUNE_C22 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C23[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R124 (7Ch) SE2_RETU NE_C23 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 7Ch SE2_RETUNE_C23 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C24[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R125 (7Dh) SE2_RETU NE_C24 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 7Dh SE2_RETUNE_C24 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 150 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C25[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R126 (7Eh) SE2_RETU NE_C25 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 7Eh SE2_RETUNE_C25 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C26[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R127 (7Fh) SE2_RETU NE_C26 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 7Fh SE2_RETUNE_C26 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C27[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R128 (80h) SE2_RETU NE_C27 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 80h SE2_RETUNE_C27 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C28[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R129 (81h) SE2_RETU NE_C28 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 81h SE2_RETUNE_C28 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C29[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R130 (82h) SE2_RETU NE_C29 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 82h SE2_RETUNE_C29 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C30[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R131 (83h) SE2_RETU NE_C30 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 83h SE2_RETUNE_C30 REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_RETUNE _C31[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R132 (84h) SE2_RETU NE_C31 0000_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) ReTune™ filter 00_0000 Register 84h SE2_RETUNE_C31 w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 151 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL DEFAULT 0 SE2_5BEQ_L_ ENA 0 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R133 (85h) SE2_5BEQ_ CONFIG SE2 Left channel 5-band EQ enable 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled Register 85h SE2_5BEQ_CONFIG REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 12:8 SE2_5BEQ_L1 G[4:0] 0_1100 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R134 (86h) SE2_5BEQ_ L10G Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter Gain 00000 : -12dB 00001 : -12dB 00010 : -10dB 00011 : -9dB 00100 : -8dB 00101 : -7dB 00110 : -6dB 00111 : -5dB 01000 : -4dB 01001 : -3dB 01010 : -2dB 01011 : -1dB 01100 : 0dB 01101 : 1dB 01110 : 2dB 01111 : 3dB 10000 : 4dB 10001 : 5dB 10010 : 6dB 10011 : 7dB 10100 : 8dB 10101 : 9dB 10110 : 10dB 10111 : 11dB 11000 : 12dB 11001 to 11111 : Reserved 4:0 SE2_5BEQ_L0 G[4:0] 0_1100 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter Gain 00000 : -12dB 00001 : -12dB 00010 : -10dB 00011 : -9dB …. (1dB steps) 11000 : 12dB 11001 to 11111 : Reserved Register 86h SE2_5BEQ_L10G w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 152 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 12:8 SE2_5BEQ_L3 G[4:0] 0_1100 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R135 (87h) SE2_5BEQ_ L32G Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter Gain 00000 : -12dB 00001 : -12dB 00010 : -10dB 00011 : -9dB …. (1dB steps) 11000 : 12dB 11001 to 11111 : Reserved 4:0 SE2_5BEQ_L2 G[4:0] 0_1100 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter Gain 00000 : -12dB 00001 : -12dB 00010 : -10dB 00011 : -9dB …. (1dB steps) 11000 : 12dB 11001 to 11111 : Reserved Register 87h SE2_5BEQ_L32G REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT 4:0 SE2_5BEQ_L4 G[4:0] 0_1100 DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R136 (88h) SE2_5BEQ_ L4G Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter Gain 00000 : -12dB 00001 : -12dB 00010 : -10dB 00011 : -9dB …. (1dB steps) 11000 : 12dB 11001 to 11111 : Reserved Register 88h SE2_5BEQ_L4G REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L0 P[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R137 (89h) SE2_5BEQ_ L0P 0000_0000_11 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 01_1000 Register 89h SE2_5BEQ_L0P REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L0 A[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R138 (8Ah) SE2_5BEQ_ L0A 0000_1111_11 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 00_1010 Register 8Ah SE2_5BEQ_L0A w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 153 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L0 B[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R139 (8Bh) SE2_5BEQ_ L0B 0000_0100_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 00_0000 Register 8Bh SE2_5BEQ_L0B REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L1 P[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R140 (8Ch) SE2_5BEQ_ L1P 0000_0001_11 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 00_0101 Register 8Ch SE2_5BEQ_L1P REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L1 A[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R141 (8Dh) SE2_5BEQ_ L1A 0001_1110_10 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 11_0101 Register 8Dh SE2_5BEQ_L1A REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R142 (8Eh) SE2_5BEQ_ L1B 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L1 1111_0001_01 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter B[15:0] 00_0101 Register 8Eh SE2_5BEQ_L1B REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R143 (8Fh) SE2_5BEQ_ L1C 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L1 0000_1011_01 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter C[15:0] 11_0101 Register 8Fh SE2_5BEQ_L1C REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R144 (90h) SE2_5BEQ_ L2P 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L2 0000_0101_01 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter P[15:0] 01_1000 Register 90h SE2_5BEQ_L2P REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R145 (91h) SE2_5BEQ_ L2A 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L2 0001_1100_01 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter A[15:0] 01_1000 Register 91h SE2_5BEQ_L2A w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 154 WM8945 Production Data REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R146 (92h) SE2_5BEQ_ L2B 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L2 1111_0011_01 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter B[15:0] 11_0011 Register 92h SE2_5BEQ_L2B REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R147 (93h) SE2_5BEQ_ L2C 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L2 0000_1010_01 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter C[15:0] 01_0100 Register 93h SE2_5BEQ_L2C REGISTER BIT LABEL DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R148 (94h) SE2_5BEQ_ L3P 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L3 0001_0001_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter P[15:0] 00_0011 Register 94h SE2_5BEQ_L3P REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L3 A[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R149 (95h) SE2_5BEQ_ L3A 0001_0110_10 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 00_1110 Register 95h SE2_5BEQ_L3A REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L3 B[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R150 (96h) SE2_5BEQ_ L3B 1111_1000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 10_1001 Register 96h SE2_5BEQ_L3B REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L3 C[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R151 (97h) SE2_5BEQ_ L3C 0000_0111_10 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 10_1101 Register 97h SE2_5BEQ_L3C REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L4 P[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R152 (98h) SE2_5BEQ_ L4P 0100_0000_00 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 00_0000 Register 98h SE2_5BEQ_L4P w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 155 WM8945 REGISTER Production Data BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L4 A[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R153 (99h) SE2_5BEQ_ L4A 0000_0101_01 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 10_0100 Register 99h SE2_5BEQ_L4A REGISTER BIT LABEL 15:0 SE2_5BEQ_L4 B[15:0] DEFAULT DESCRIPTION REFER TO ADDRESS R154 (9Ah) SE2_5BEQ_ L4B 0000_0101_01 Filter coefficients for Signal Enhancement 2 (SE2) left channel 5-band EQ filter 01_1001 Register 9Ah SE2_5BEQ_L4B w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 156 WM8945 Production Data DIGITAL FILTER CHARACTERISTICS PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS MIN +/- 0.1dB 0 TYP MAX UNIT ADC Filter Passband 0.454 fs -6dB 0.5fs Passband Ripple +/- 0.1 Stopband dB 0.546s Stopband Attenuation f > 0.546 fs -60 +/- 0.03dB 0 dB DAC Normal Filter Passband 0.454 fs -6dB Passband Ripple 0.5 fs 0.454 fs +/- 0.03 Stopband dB 0.546 fs Stopband Attenuation F > 0.546 fs -50 dB DAC Sloping Stopband Filter Passband +/- 0.03dB 0 0.25 fs +/- 1dB 0.25 fs 0.454 fs -6dB Passband Ripple 0.5 fs 0.25 fs +/- 0.03 Stopband 1 0.546 fs Stopband 1 Attenuation f > 0.546 fs -60 Stopband 2 dB 0.7 fs Stopband 2 Attenuation dB 0.7 fs f > 0.7 fs 1.4 fs -85 Stopband 3 dB 1.4 fs Stopband 3 Attenuation F > 1.4 fs -55 DAC FILTERS dB ADC FILTERS Mode Group Delay Mode Group Delay Normal 16.5 / fs Normal 16.5 / fs Sloping Stopband 18 / fs TERMINOLOGY 1. Stop Band Attenuation (dB) – the degree to which the frequency spectrum is attenuated (outside audio band) 2. Pass-band Ripple – any variation of the frequency response in the pass-band region Note: 1. The Group Delays are quoted with the DSP SE1, SE2, and SE3 filters disabled. Enabling the DSP SE1, SE2, and SE3 filters will increase the Group Delay w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 157 WM8945 Production Data ADC FILTER RESPONSE 0 -50 -100 -150 -200 0 20k 40k 60k 80k 100k 120k 140k 160k 180k Figure 50 ADC Frequency Response up to 4 x fs (Sample rate, fs = 48kHz) 30m 20m 10m 0m -10m -20m -30m -40m 0 5k 10k 15k 20k Figure 51 ADC Pass Band Frequency Response up to fs/2 (Sample rate, fs = 48kHz) w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 158 WM8945 Production Data ADC HIGHPASS FILTER RESPONSE 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 1 10 0.1K Figure 52 ADC High Pass Filter Frequency Response for the Hi-FI Mode (Sample rate, fs = 48kHz) Apps0 0 Apps1 Apps2 Apps3 Apps4 -5 Apps5 Apps6 Apps7 -10 -15 -20 10 0.1K 1K Figure 53 ADC High Pass Filter Frequency Response for the Application Mode (Sample rate, fs = 48kHz) w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 159 WM8945 Production Data DAC FILTER RESPONSE 0 -50 -100 -150 -200 0 20k 40k 60k 80k 100k 120k 140k 160k 180k Figure 54 DAC Frequency Response up to 4 x fs (Sample rate, fs = 32k to 48kHz) 0 -50 -100 -150 -200 0 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k 60k 70k 80k 90k Figure 55 DAC Frequency Response up to 4 x fs (Sample rate, fs = 16k to 24kHz) w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 160 WM8945 Production Data 0 -50 -100 -150 -200 0 10k 20k 30k 40k Figure 56 DAC Frequency Response up to 4 x fs (Sample rate, fs = 8k to 12kHz) 12k 24k 40m 48k 20m 0m -20m -40m -60m 0 5k 10k 15k 20k Figure 57 DAC Pass Band Frequency Response up to fs/2 (Sample rate, fs = 8k to 12kHz, 16k to 24kHz, 32k to 48kHz) w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 161 WM8945 Production Data APPLICATIONS INFORMATION RECOMMENDED EXTERNAL COMPONENTS AUDIO INPUT PATHS The WM8945 provides up to 4 analogue audio inputs (including the auxiliary inputs AUX1 and AUX2). Each of these inputs is referenced to the internal DC reference, VMID. A DC blocking capacitor is required for each input pin used in the target application. The choice of capacitor is determined by the filter that is formed between that capacitor and the input impedance of the input pin. The circuit is illustrated in Figure 58. (Note that capacitors are not required on any unused audio input.) Figure 58 Audio Input Path DC Blocking Capacitor When the input impedance is known, and the cut-off frequency is known, then the minimum capacitor value may be derived easily. For practical use, a 1F capacitance for all audio inputs can be recommended for most cases. Tantalum electrolytic capacitors are particularly suitable as they offer high stability in a small package size. Ceramic equivalents are a cost effective alternative to the superior tantalum packages, but care must be taken to ensure the desired capacitance is maintained at the LDOVOUT operating voltage. Also, ceramic capacitors may show microphonic effects, where vibrations and mechanical conditions give rise to electrical signals. This is particularly problematic for microphone input paths where a large signal gain is required. A single capacitor is required for a line input or single-ended microphone connection. In the case of a differential microphone connection, a DC blocking capacitor is required on both input pins. HEADPHONE / LINE OUTPUT PATHS The WM8945 provides three outputs (LINEOUTL, SPKOUTL and SPKOUTR). Each of these outputs is referenced to the internal DC reference, VMID. In any case where a line output is used in a singleended configuration (i.e. referenced to GND), a DC blocking capacitor is required in order to remove the DC bias. In the case where a pair of line outputs is configured as a BTL differential pair, then the DC blocking capacitor should be omitted. The choice of capacitor is determined from the filter that is formed between the capacitor and the load impedance. A 1F capacitance would be a suitable choice for a line or headphone load. Tantalum electrolytic capacitors are again particularly suitable but ceramic equivalents are a cost effective alternative. Care must be taken to ensure the desired capacitance is maintained at the appropriate operating voltage. Figure 59 DC-blocking Components for Line Output w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 162 WM8945 Production Data 100 uF SPKOUTL 100 uF 32 ohm load SPKOUTR GND GND = 0V Figure 60 DC-blocking Components for Headphone Output BTL SPEAKER OUTPUT CONNECTION The BTL speaker output connection is a differential mode of operation. The loudspeaker may be connected directly across the SPKOUTL and SPKOUTR pins. No additional external components are required in this case. POWER SUPPLY DECOUPLING Electrical coupling exists particularly in digital logic systems where switching in one sub-system causes fluctuations on the power supply. This effect occurs because the inductance of the power supply acts in opposition to the changes in current flow that are caused by the logic switching. The resultant variations (or ‘spikes’) in the power supply voltage can cause malfunctions and unintentional behavior in other components. A decoupling (or ‘bypass’) capacitor can be used as an energy storage component which will provide power to the decoupled circuit for the duration of these power supply variations, protecting it from malfunctions that could otherwise arise. Coupling also occurs in a lower frequency form when ripple is present on the power supply rail caused by changes in the load current or by limitations of the power supply regulation method. In audio components such as the WM8945, these variations can alter the performance of the signal path, leading to degradation in signal quality. A decoupling (or ‘bypass’) capacitor can be used to filter these effects, by presenting the ripple voltage with a low impedance path that does not affect the circuit to be decoupled. These coupling effects are addressed by placing a capacitor between the supply rail and the corresponding ground reference. In the case of systems comprising multiple power supply rails, decoupling should be provided on each rail. The recommended power supply decoupling capacitors for WM8945 are listed below in Table 72. POWER SUPPLY DECOUPLING CAPACITOR DCVDD, DBVDD, LDOVDD, SPKVDD 4.7F ceramic LDOVOUT 2.2F ceramic VMIDC 4.7F ceramic Table 72 Power Supply Decoupling Capacitors All decoupling capacitors should be placed as close as possible to the WM8945 device. The connection between GND, the LDOVOUT decoupling capacitor and the main system ground should be made at a single point as close as possible to the GND ball of the WM8945. The VMIDC capacitor is not, technically, a decoupling capacitor. However, it does serve a similar purpose in filtering noise on the VMID reference. The connection between GND, the VMID decoupling capacitor and the main system ground should be made at a single point as close as possible to the GND ball of the WM8945. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 163 WM8945 Production Data Due to the wide tolerance of many types of ceramic capacitors, care must be taken to ensure that the selected components provide the required capacitance across the required temperature and voltage ranges in the intended application. For most application the use of ceramic capacitors with capacitor dielectric X5R is recommended. MICROPHONE BIAS CIRCUIT The WM8945 is designed to interface easily with electret microphones. These may be connected in single-ended or differential configurations. The single-ended method allows greater capability for the connection of multiple audio sources simultaneously, whilst the differential method provides better performance due to its rejection of common-mode noise. In either configuration, the microphone requires a bias current (electret condenser microphones) or voltage supply (silicon microphones), which can be provided by MICBIAS. This reference is generated by an output-compensated amplifier, which requires an external capacitor in order to guarantee accuracy and stability. The recommended capacitance is 4.7F, although it may be possible to reduce this to 1F if the analogue supply (LDOVOUT) is not too noisy. A ceramic type is a suitable choice here, providing that care is taken to choose a component that exhibits this capacitance at the intended MICBIAS voltage. Note that the MICBIAS voltage may be adjusted using register control to suit the requirements of the microphone. Also note the WM8945 supports a maximum current of 3mA. If more than one microphone is connected to the MICBIAS, then combined current must not exceed 3mA. A current-limiting resistor is also required when using an electret condenser microphone (ECM). The resistance should be chosen according to the minimum operating impedance of the microphone and MICBIAS voltage so that the maximum bias current of the WM8945 is not exceeded. Wolfson recommends a 2.2k current limiting resistor as it provides compatibility with a wide range of microphone models. The recommended connections for single-ended and differential microphone modes are illustrated in Figure 61 and Figure 62. Figure 61 Single-Ended Microphone Connection w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 164 WM8945 Production Data Figure 62 Pseudo-Differential Microphone Connection VIDEO BUFFER COMPONENTS External components are required for the Video Buffer. In a typical application, RLOAD = 75, RSOURCE = 75, RREF = 187. See “Video Buffer” for details of alternative components under different load impedance conditions. Figure 63 Typical Components for Video Buffer w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 165 WM8945 Production Data RECOMMENDED EXTERNAL COMPONENTS DIAGRAM Figure 64 provides a summary of recommended external components for WM8945. Note that the actual requirements may differ according to the specific target application. Figure 64 WM8945 Recommended External Components Diagram PCB LAYOUT CONSIDERATIONS Poor PCB layout will degrade the performance and be a contributory factor in EMI, ground bounce and resistive voltage losses. All external components should be placed as close to the WM8945 device as possible, with current loop areas kept as small as possible. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 166 WM8945 Production Data PACKAGE DIMENSIONS B: 36 BALL W-CSP PACKAGE 2.960 X 3.060 X 0.7mm BODY, 0.50 mm BALL PITCH DM063.A 6 D DETAIL 1 A 2 G 6 A2 5 3 4 2 1 A A1 CORNER 4 B e 5 C E1 E D E F 2X e DETAIL 2 2X D1 0.10 Z 0.10 Z TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW f1 f2 bbb Z h 1 Z A1 DETAIL 2 Symbols A A1 A2 D D1 E E1 e f1 f2 g h MIN 0.615 0.219 0.361 Dimensions (mm) NOM MAX 0.7 0.785 0.244 0.269 0.411 0.386 2.960 BSC 2.500 BSC 3.060 BSC 2.500 BSC 0.500 BSC NOTE 5 0.220 0.270 0.070 0.035 0.105 0.314 BSC NOTES: 1. PRIMARY DATUM -Z- AND SEATING PLANE ARE DEFINED BY THE SPHERICAL CROWNS OF THE SOLDER BALLS. 2. THIS DIMENSION INCLUDES STAND-OFF HEIGHT ‘A1’ AND BACKSIDE COATING. 3. A1 CORNER IS IDENTIFIED BY INK/LASER MARK ON TOP PACKAGE. 4. BILATERAL TOLERANCE ZONE IS APPLIED TO EACH SIDE OF THE PACKAGE BODY. 5. ‘e’ REPRESENTS THE BASIC SOLDER BALL GRID PITCH. 6. THIS DRAWING IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. 7. FOLLOWS JEDEC DESIGN GUIDE MO-211-C. w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 167 WM8945 Production Data IMPORTANT NOTICE Wolfson Microelectronics plc (“Wolfson”) products and services are sold subject to Wolfson’s terms and conditions of sale, delivery and payment supplied at the time of order acknowledgement. Wolfson warrants performance of its products to the specifications in effect at the date of shipment. Wolfson reserves the right to make changes to its products and specifications or to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should therefore obtain the latest version of relevant information from Wolfson to verify that the information is current. Testing and other quality control techniques are utilised to the extent Wolfson deems necessary to support its warranty. Specific testing of all parameters of each device is not necessarily performed unless required by law or regulation. In order to minimise risks associated with customer applications, the customer must use adequate design and operating safeguards to minimise inherent or procedural hazards. Wolfson is not liable for applications assistance or customer product design. The customer is solely responsible for its selection and use of Wolfson products. Wolfson is not liable for such selection or use nor for use of any circuitry other than circuitry entirely embodied in a Wolfson product. Wolfson’s products are not intended for use in life support systems, appliances, nuclear systems or systems where malfunction can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. Any use of products by the customer for such purposes is at the customer’s own risk. Wolfson does not grant any licence (express or implied) under any patent right, copyright, mask work right or other intellectual property right of Wolfson covering or relating to any combination, machine, or process in which its products or services might be or are used. Any provision or publication of any third party’s products or services does not constitute Wolfson’s approval, licence, warranty or endorsement thereof. Any third party trade marks contained in this document belong to the respective third party owner. Reproduction of information from Wolfson datasheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated copyright, proprietary and other notices (including this notice) and conditions. Wolfson is not liable for any unauthorised alteration of such information or for any reliance placed thereon. Any representations made, warranties given, and/or liabilities accepted by any person which differ from those contained in this datasheet or in Wolfson’s standard terms and conditions of sale, delivery and payment are made, given and/or accepted at that person’s own risk. Wolfson is not liable for any such representations, warranties or liabilities or for any reliance placed thereon by any person. ADDRESS: Wolfson Microelectronics plc 26 Westfield Road Edinburgh EH11 2QB United Kingdom Tel :: +44 (0)131 272 7000 Fax :: +44 (0)131 272 7001 Email :: [email protected] w PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 168 WM8945 Production Data REVISION HISTORY DATE REV 08/10/10 4.0 DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES 13 Added comment about ADC volume being in digital filter block 29 Added comment about DAC volume being in digital filter block Notch filter plots updated Added note about DAC_VOL_RAMP rate R56 TCH_ISEL currents changed from 200uA and 460uA 15/05/11 4.1 PAGE Touch pressure current added Added note about LDOVDD being enabled before SPKVDD for popfree start-up w 47 35, 36 CHANGED BY BC 47 89, 142 8 JJ PD, May 2011, Rev 4.1 169